General Precautions

General Precautions
Observe the following Precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral devices.
This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to
describe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers are on the
product before use.
Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.
Definition of Precautionary Information

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
DANGER serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
WARNING serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
Caution moderate injury, or property damage.

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electric shock or
WARNING injury.

Wiring or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power sup-
ply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicator) is OFF and
WARNING after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result
in electrical shock.

Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on or pinch the
WARNING cables. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may
WARNING result in injury.

Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
WARNING product.

Do not store, install or operate the product in the following places. Doing so
may result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range
specified in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in
Caution temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gasses.
• Locations very close to combustable materials.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibrations.

i
 Do not touch the Inverters cooling fins, regenerative resistor or the motor
Caution while the power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing
so may result in a skinburn due to the hot surface.

Do not conduct a dielectric stregth test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so
Caution may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in

the following locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Caution • Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic
fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radio activity.
• Locations close to power supplies.

ii
 Transportation Precautions

Transportation Precautions

Do not hold by front cover or panel. Instead hold by the cooling fins (heat
Caution sink) while transporting the product. Doing so may result in injury.

Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damge to the product or mal-
Caution function.

Use the eyebolts only for transport of the Inverter. Using them to transport the
Caution Inverter and attached equipment may result in injury or malfunction.

Installation Precautions

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (

WARNING A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety) Not doing so may
result in injury.

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous

WARNING stop of operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified
Caution clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices to
allow for proper cooling. Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in
Caution fire and malfunction.

Do not apply any strong imact. Doing so may result in damage to the product
Caution or malfunction.

Wiring Precautions

Wiring must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply. Not
WARNING doing so may result in electrical shock.

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in

WARNING electrical shock.

Be sur to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not
WARNING doing so may result in injury.

Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ohm or less for 200-
Required V AC class or 10 Ohm or less for the 400-V class. Not connecting to a proper
ground may result in electrical shock or fire.

iii
 Install external circuit breakers and take other safety measures against shortcir-
Caution cuiting in external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC
Caution power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury or
malfunction.

Connect the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the man-
Caution ual. Not doing so may result in fire.

Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or
Caution damage to the product.

Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may
Caution result in fire, injury or damage to the product.

Do not connect an AC power source to the U,V,W output. Doing so may result
Caution in damage to the product or malfunction.

Do not connect a load to the machine during auto-tuning. Not doing so may
Caution result in equipment damage.

iv
 Operation and Adjustment Precautions

Operation and Adjustment Precautions

Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal
WARNING covers, bottom cover, Operator and optional items. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.
Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator or
WARNING optional items while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in elec-
trical shock or damage to the product

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result
WARNING in electrical shock.

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied. Doing
WARNING so may result in electrical shock.

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because
WARNING the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result
in injury.
Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary
power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be con-
WARNING tinued in the processing selection function after momentary power is reset).
Doing so may result in injury.
Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Oper-
WARNING ator is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may
result in injury.
Be sure to confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before tuning ON the
WARNING power supply, resetting the alarm or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector.
Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON my result in injury.
Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before opera-
Caution tion because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not
doing so may result in damage to the product.

Provide a separate holding brake when neccessary. Not doing so may result in
Caution injury.

Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury
Caution or damage to the product.

Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to

Caution the product.

v
 Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied. Doing
WARNING so may result in electrical shock.

Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the

power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicator) is
WARNING OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so
may result in electrical shock.

Maintenance, inspection or parts replacement must be performed by autho-

WARNING rized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the product. Doing so may result in

Prohibited electrical shock or injury.

Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless

Caution handling may result in malfunction.

Do not exchange, wiring, the Operator, optional cover, disconnect connectors

Caution or replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury,
damage to the product or malfunction.

vi
 Warning Information and Position

Warning Information and Position

There is warning information on the Inverter in the positon shown in the following illustration.
Aways read the warnings.

Warning
information
position Warning
information
position

Illustration shows the 3G3PV-A2004-E Illustration shows the 3G3PV-B2220-E

Warning information

WARNING

Risk of electric shock.

• Read manual before installing.
• Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply.

AVERTISSEMENT

Risque de décharge électrique.

• Lire le manual avant l’installation.

• Attendre 5 minutes aprés la coupure de
l’allmentation. Pour permettre la décharge
des condensateurs.

vii
 Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• MODBUS is a trademark of the AEG Schneider Automation, Inc.

viii
 Contents
1 Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
SYSDRIVE PV Introduction..........................................................................1-2
‹ SYSDRIVE PV Applications ........................................................................................... 1-2
‹ SYSDRIVE PV Models ................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-4
‹ Checks............................................................................................................................ 1-4
‹ Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4
‹ Component Names......................................................................................................... 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-8
‹ Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-8
‹ Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA 1) .................................................................. 1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................1-10
‹ Installation Site .............................................................................................................1-10
‹ Controlling the Ambient Temperature ........................................................................... 1-10
‹ Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter.................................................................. 1-10
Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-11
‹ Inverter Installation Orientation and Space................................................................... 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-12
‹ Removing the Terminal Cover ......................................................................................1-12
‹ Attaching the Terminal Cover........................................................................................ 1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-13
‹ Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less.........................................................................................1-13
‹ Inverters of 22 kW or More ...........................................................................................1-16
2 Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Wiring ...........................................................................................................2-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-3
Connection Diagrams ...................................................................................2-4
‹ Circuit descriptions ......................................................................................................... 2-5
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-7
‹ Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-7
‹ Main Circuit Terminal functions .................................................................................... 2-12
‹ Main Circuit configurations ...........................................................................................2-13
‹ Standard Connection Diagrams.................................................................................... 2-14
‹ Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................2-15

ix
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals................................................................. 2-22
‹ Wire Sizes ................................................................................................................... 2-22
‹ Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-24
‹ Control Circuit Terminal Connections........................................................................... 2-27
‹ Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ............................................................................... 2-28
Wiring Check.............................................................................................. 2-29
‹ Checks ......................................................................................................................... 2-29
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-30
‹ Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-30
‹ Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-30
3 Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
‹ Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-5
‹ Inverter Modes ............................................................................................................... 3-5
‹ Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-6
‹ Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-7
‹ Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-8
‹ Advanced Programming Mode....................................................................................... 3-9
‹ Verify Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-11
‹ Autotuning Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-12
4 Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Cautions and Warnings ................................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation Flowchart ............................................................................. 4-3
Trial Operation Procedures .......................................................................... 4-4
‹ Application Confirmation ................................................................................................ 4-4
‹ Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400-V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) 4-4
‹ Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-4
‹ Checking the Display Status .......................................................................................... 4-5
‹ Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-6
‹ Selecting the V/f pattern ................................................................................................. 4-7
‹ Application Settings...................................................................................................... 4-10
‹ No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-10
‹ Loaded Operation......................................................................................................... 4-11
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-13

5 Parameters ...............................................................................5-1
Parameter Descriptions................................................................................ 5-2
‹ Description of Parameter Tables .................................................................................... 5-2
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels ............................................ 5-3

x
 ‹ Parameters Settable in Quick Programming Mode ........................................................ 5-4
Parameter Tables .........................................................................................5-7
‹ A: Setup Settings ............................................................................................................ 5-7
‹ Application Parameters: b............................................................................................... 5-8
‹ Tuning Parameters: C...................................................................................................5-13
‹ Reference Parameters: d..............................................................................................5-16
‹ Motor Constant Parameters: E .....................................................................................5-18
‹ Option Parameters: F ...................................................................................................5-19
‹ Terminal Function Parameters: H.................................................................................5-20
‹ Protection Function Parameters: L ............................................................................... 5-26
‹ N: Special Adjustments................................................................................................. 5-32
‹ Digital Operator Parameters: o .....................................................................................5-33
‹ T: Motor Autotuning ...................................................................................................... 5-36
‹ U: Monitor Parameters.................................................................................................. 5-37
‹ Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................. 5-44
6 Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 6-1
Application and Overload Selections............................................................6-2
‹ Select the Overload to Suit the Application .................................................................... 6-2
Frequency Reference ...................................................................................6-4
‹ Selecting the Frequency Reference Source ................................................................... 6-4
‹ Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ................................................................................. 6-6
Run Command .............................................................................................6-8
‹ Selecting the Run Command Source ............................................................................. 6-8
Stopping Methods.......................................................................................6-10
‹ Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop command is Input .................................. 6-10
‹ Using the DC Injection Brake........................................................................................ 6-13
‹ Using Highslip Braking.................................................................................................. 6-14
‹ Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................ 6-16
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-17
‹ Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ...............................................................6-17
‹ Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) ...........................................................6-19
‹ Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)...........................................................6-21

Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-22

‹ Adjusting Analog Frequency References ..................................................................... 6-22
‹ Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) .......................................6-24
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-26
‹ Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ........................................................................... 6-26
‹ Limiting Minimum Frequency........................................................................................ 6-26
Improved Operating Efficiency ...................................................................6-27
‹ Field-weakening option................................................................................................. 6-28
‹ Hunting-prevention Function.........................................................................................6-29

xi
 Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-30
‹ Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-30
‹ Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-30
‹ Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-33
‹ Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-35
Continuing Operation ................................................................................. 6-37
‹ Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored ....................................................... 6-37
‹ Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-38
‹ Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ........... 6-43
‹ Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-43
Inverter Protection...................................................................................... 6-45
‹ Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-45
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-46
‹ Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator
and Control Circuit Terminals ....................................................................................... 6-46
‹ Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)...................................................... 6-46
‹ Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing ........................................................... 6-47
‹ Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card
and Control Circuit Terminals....................................................................................... 6-48
‹ Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG) .............................................................................................................. 6-48
‹ Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Error Function) .............................................................................................. 6-49

Monitor Parameters.................................................................................... 6-50

‹ Using the Analog Monitor Parameters ......................................................................... 6-50
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-52
‹ Using PI Control ........................................................................................................... 6-65
‹ Energy-saving .............................................................................................................. 6-72
‹ Setting Motor Constant Parameters ............................................................................. 6-73
‹ Setting the V/f Pattern .................................................................................................. 6-74
Digital Operator Functions ......................................................................... 6-80
‹ Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................... 6-80
‹ Copying Parameters..................................................................................................... 6-82
‹ Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator ............................................ 6-86
‹ Setting a Password ...................................................................................................... 6-86
7 Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions............................................................ 7-2
‹ Fault Detection ............................................................................................................... 7-2
‹ Alarm Detection.............................................................................................................. 7-7
‹ Operation Errors............................................................................................................. 7-9
‹ Errors During Autotuning............................................................................................. 7-10
‹ Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function ............................................... 7-11
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 7-12

xii
 ‹ If Parameters Cannot Be Set........................................................................................ 7-12
‹ If the Motor Does Not Operate......................................................................................7-13
‹ If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-14
‹ If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration Is Slow.................................. 7-15
‹ If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ....................................................... 7-15
‹ If Motor Deceleration Is Slow........................................................................................ 7-15
‹ If the Motor Overheats .................................................................................................. 7-16
‹ If peripheral devices are influenced by starting the Inverter .........................................7-16
‹ If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter Is Run ............................. 7-17
‹ If There Is Mechanical Oscillation.................................................................................7-17
‹ If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output Is Stopped .......................................7-17
‹ If 0 V Is Detected When the Fan Is Started, or the Fan Stalls ...................................... 7-18
‹ If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ...................................... 7-18
8 Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
Maintenance and Inspection.........................................................................8-2
‹ Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
‹ Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
‹ Periodic Maintenance of Parts........................................................................................ 8-3
‹ Cooling Fan Replacement Outline.................................................................................. 8-4
‹ Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card ........................................... 8-6
9 Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications...................................................................9-2
‹ Specifications by Model .................................................................................................. 9-2
‹ Common Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-5
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices........................................9-6
Options and Peripheral Devices ...................................................................9-7
‹ Special Mounted Options................................................................................................ 9-9
‹ Separately Installed Options.........................................................................................9-10
10 Inverter application Precautionspendix ............................. 10-1
‹ Selection .......................................................................................................................10-2
‹ Installation.....................................................................................................................10-3
‹ Settings.........................................................................................................................10-3
‹ Handling........................................................................................................................ 10-4
Motor Application Precautions....................................................................10-5
‹ Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor........................................................ 10-5
‹ Using the Inverter for Special Motors ........................................................................... 10-6
‹ Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)......................10-6
Wiring Examples.........................................................................................10-7
‹ Using a Braking Resistor Unit.......................................................................................10-7
‹ Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit ...........................................................10-7
‹ Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel ..............................10-9

xiii
 ‹ Using an Analog Operator.......................................................................................... 10-10
Parameters............................................................................................... 10-11
Revision History ....................................................................................... 10-14

xiv
 1
Chapter 1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.

SYSDRIVE PV Introduction..................................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery.................................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .......................................1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .................... 1-11
Installation Orientation and Space .......................................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover......................1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover....................................................................1-14
 SYSDRIVE PV Introduction

‹ SYSDRIVE PV Applications
The SYSDRIVE PV is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower and pump applications

Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.

‹ SYSDRIVE PV Models
The SYSDRIVE PV Series of Inverters includes two kinds of Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and
400 V. Maximum motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 160 kW.

Table 1.1 SYSDRIVE PV Models

Protective Structure Maximum Motor Capacity Basic Model Number

0.4 kW 3G3PV-A2004-E
0.75 kW 3G3PV-A2007-E
1.5 kW 3G3PV-A2015-E
2.2 kW 3G3PV-A2022-E
3.7 kW 3G3PV-A2037-E
5.5 kW 3G3PV-A2055-E
7.5 kW 3G3PV-A2075-E
NEMA 1 type 11 kW 3G3PV-A2110-E
IP20
15 kW 3G3PV-A2150-E

(200 V class) 18.5 kW 3G3PV-A2185-E

22 kW 3G3PV-A2220-E
30 kW 3G3PV-A2300-E
37 kW 3G3PV-A2370-E
45 kW 3G3PV-A2450-E
55 kW 3G3PV-A2550-E
75 kW 3G3PV-A2750-E
90 kW 3G3PV-A2900-E

22 kW 3G3PV-B2220-E
30 kW 3G3PV-B2300-E

Open Chassis type 37 kW 3G3PV-B2370-E

IP00 45 kW 3G3PV-B2450-E
55 kW 3G3PV-B2550-E
(200 V class) 75 kW 3G3PV-B2750-E
90 kW 3G3PV-B2900-E
110 kW 3G3PV-B211K-E

1-2
 SYSDRIVE PV Introduction

Protective Structure Maximum Motor Capacity Basic Model Number

0.4 kW 3G3PV-A4004-E
0.75 kW 3G3PV-A4007-E
1.5 kW 3G3PV-A4015-E
2.2 kW 3G3PV-A4022-E
3.7 kW 3G3PV-A4037-E
4.0 kW 3G3PV-A4040-E
5.5 kW 3G3PV-A4055-E
7.5 kW 3G3PV-A4075-E
11 kW 3G3PV-A4110-E
NEMA 1 type 15 kW 3G3PV-A4150-E
IP20
18.5 kW 3G3PV-A4185-E
22 kW 3G3PV-A4220-E
400 V class
30 kW 3G3PV-A4300-E
37 kW 3G3PV-A4370-E
45 kW 3G3PV-A4450-E
55 kW 3G3PV-A4550-E
75 kW 3G3PV-A4750-E
90 kW 3G3PV-A4900-E
110 kW 3G3PV-A411K-E
132 kW 3G3PV-A413K-E
160 kW 3G3PV-A416K-E

22 kW 3G3PV-B4220-E
30 kW 3G3PV-B4300-E
37 kW 3G3PV-B4370-E
Open Chassis type 45 kW 3G3PV-B4450-E
IP00 55 kW 3G3PV-B4550-E
75 kW 3G3PV-B4750-E
(400 V class) 90 kW 3G3PV-B4900-E
110 kW 3G3PV-B411K-E
132 kW 3G3PV-B413K-E
160 kW 3G3PV-B416K-E

1-3
 Confirmations upon Delivery

‹ Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.

Table 1.2 Checks

Item Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
delivered?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
loose?

If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your OMRON representative immediately.

‹ Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifica-
tions, lot number, serial number and other information on the Inverter.

„ Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for an European Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 37 kW, IEC IP00

Inverter model

Input specification
Output specification
Lot number Mass
Serial number

Fig 1.1 Nameplate

1-4
 Confirmations upon Delivery

„Inverter Model Numbers

The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.

G3PV -A 2 037 -E

Specifications -E (European Model)

Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity

004 0.4 kW 055 5.5 kW 220 22 kW 750 75 kW

007 0.75 kW 075 7.5 kW 300 30 kW 900 90 kW

015 1.5 kW 110 11 kW 370 37 kW 11K 110 kW

022 2.2 kW 150 15 kW 450 45 kW 13K 130 kW

037 3.7 kW 185 18.5 kW 550 55 kW 16K 160 kW

040 4.0 kW

Voltage Class
2 AC-input, 3-phase, 200 V (200-V Class)

4 AC-input, 3-phase, 400 V (400-V Class)

Installation type

A Panel mounting or closed wall-mounting (IEC IP20, NEMA 1)

B Open Chassis (IEC IP00)

Series Name 3G3PV Series

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)

Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
TERMS
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior and can thus be mounted to the
interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure con-
forms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA.
Top protective cover (Fig. 1.3) has to be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA Type 1 requirements.

1-5
 ‹ Component Names

„ Inverter Appearance
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.3. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.4.

Top protective cover (Part of Enclosed Wall-

mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)

Mounting hole
Front cover

Digital Operator Diecast case

Terminal cover Nameplate

Bottom protective cover

Fig 1.3 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 1.4 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)

1-6
 Confirmations upon Delivery

„ Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.5. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.6.

Mounting holes
Inverter cover

Cooling fan
Front cover

Digital Operator

Nameplate
Terminal cover

Fig 1.5 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)

Control
circuit
terminals
Charge indicator

Main
circuit
terminals

Ground terminal

Fig 1.6 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)

1-7
 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

‹ Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.

200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 110 kW

400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW

Fig 1.7 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters

‹ Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)

Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) are shown below.

Grommet

200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 90 kW

200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW

Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters

1-8
 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)

Max. Caloric
Dimensions (mm)
Appli- Value(W)
Voltage cable Open Chassis (IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1, IP20) Total Cool-
ing
Class Motor Heat
Ap- Ap- Mount- Exter Inter- Method
Gen-
Output W0 W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 prox. W0 W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 prox.
ing nal nal
Holes era-
[kW] Mass Mass d* tion
0.4 20 39 59
0.75 27 42 69 Natu-
157 39 3 157 39 3
1.5 50 50 100 ral
140 280 126 266 7 5 140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5
2.2 0 70 59 129
3.7 112 74 186
- 177 59 4 - 177 59 4
5.5 164 84 248
7.5 6 300 6 219 113 332
200 300 197 186 285 65.5 200 197 186 300 285 65.5
11 7 310 10 7 374 170 544
200 V 15 350 0 429 183 612
240 350 207 216 335 7.5 78 2.3 11 240 207 216 350 335 7.5 78 2.3 11 M6
(3-phase) 18.5 380 30 501 211 712
22 345 254 400 195 385 21 345 255 535 195 400 385 135 24 586 274 860
258 100 258 100 Fan
30 370 279 450 220 435 24 370 280 615 220 450 435 165 27 865 352 1217
37 298 100 57 300 100 62 1015 411 1426
470 379 600 250 575 470 380 809 250 600 575 210
45 328 63 330 68 1266 505 1771
13 3.2 13 3.2 M10
55 86 130 94 1588 619 2207
545 454 725 348 325 700 130 545 455 1027 350 325 725 700 305
75 87 95 2019 838 997
90 615 505 850 358 370 820 108 615 504 1243 360 370 828 820 7.8 408 130 4.5 114 2437 997 3434
15 4.5 M12
110 690 579 885 378 445 855 140 150 Not available. Use IP00 type.- 2733 1242 3975
0.4 14 39 53
Natu-
0.75 157 39 3 157 39 3 17 41 58
ral
1.5 36 48 84
2.2 140 280 126 266 7 5 140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5 59 56 115
3.7 80 68 148
177 59 4 177 59 4
4.0 - - 0 70 91 161
5.5 127 82 209
7.5 193 114 307
200 300 197 186 285 65.5 6 200 300 197 186 300 285 65.5 6
11 252 158 410
15 326 172 498
400 V 240 350 207 216 335 78 10 240 350 207 216 350 335 78 10
18.5 426 208 634
(3-phase)
22 7.5 2.3 7.5 2.3 M6 466 259 725
370 280 450 258 220 435 100 21 370 280 535 258 220 450 435 100 24 Fan
30 85 678 317 995
37 635 784 360 1144
45 420 329 550 283 260 535 105 36 420 329 283 260 550 535 105 40 901 415 1316
715 165
55 1203 495 1698
75 88 96 1399 575 1974
545 454 725 348 325 700 13 3.2 545 454 1100 348 325 725 700 13 305 3.2 M10
90 89 97 1614 671 2285
130 130
110 102 122 2097 853 2950
615 505 850 358 370 820 615 505 1245 358 370 850 820 395
132 15 4.5 120 15 4.5 130 M12 2388 1002 3390
160 689 579 916 378 445 855 140 160 689 579 1325 378 445 916 855 400 140 170 2791 1147 3938

* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.

1-9
 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.

‹ Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.

Table 1.4 Installation Site

Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted -10 to + 40 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis -10 to + 45 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally
enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.

‹ Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45×C.

‹ Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.

1-10
 Installation Orientation and Space

Installation Orientation and Space

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (

WARNING A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety) Not doing so may
result in injury.

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous

WARNING stop of operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified
Caution clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices to
allow for proper cooling. Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in
Caution fire and malfunction.

Do not apply any strong imact. Doing so may result in damage to the product
Caution or malfunction.

‹ Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.

50 mm min. 120 mm min.

Air

30 mm min. 120 mm min. Air

30 mm min.
50 mm min.

Horizontal Space Vertical Space

Fig 1.9 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wall-
mounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
IMPORTANT Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.

1-11
 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.

‹ Removing the Terminal Cover

„ Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc-
tions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

2
1

Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model 3G3PV-A2055-E Shown Above)

„ Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

1
2

Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model 3G3PV-B2220-E Shown Above)

‹ Attaching the Terminal Cover

When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce-
dure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove
on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.

1-12
 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front

Cover

‹ Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the
terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.

„Removing the Digital Operator

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.

2
1

Fig 1.12 Removing the Digital Operator (Model 3G3PV-A4055-E Shown Above)

1-13
 „Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

Fig 1.13 Removing the Front Cover (Model 3G3PV-A4055-E Shown Above)

„Mounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front
cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.

„Mounting the Digital Operator

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following proce-
dure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).

1-14
 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover

Fig 1.14 Mounting the Digital Operator

1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other
than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
IMPORTANT Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.

1-15
 ‹ Inverters of 22 kW or More
For Inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce-
dures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.

„Removing the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

„Removing the Front Cover

Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.15 Removing the Front Cover (Model 3G3PV-B2220-E Shown Above)

„ Attaching the Front Cover

After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.

„Attaching the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

1-16
 2
Chapter 2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit termi-
nal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications.

Wiring....................................................................................2-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices........................................2-3
Connection Diagram..............................................................2-4
Terminal Block Configuration...............................................2-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .............................................2-7
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals........................................2-22
Wiring Check.......................................................................2-29
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ....................................2-30
 Wiring

Wiring must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply. Not doing
WARNING so may result in electrical shock.

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in

WARNING electrical shock.

Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not
WARNING doing so may result in injury.

Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ohm or less for 200-
Required V AC class or 10 Ohm or less for the 400-V class. Not connecting to a proper
ground may result in electrical shock or fire.

Install external circuit breakers and take other safety measures against short-
Caution circuiting in external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC
Caution power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury or
malfunction.

Connect the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the man-
Caution ual. Not doing so may result in fire.

Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or
Caution damage to the product.

Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may
Caution result in fire, injury or damage to the product.

Do not connect an AC power source to the U,V,W output. Doing so may result
Caution in damage to the product or malfunction.

Do not connect a load to the machine during auto-tuning. Not doing so may
Caution result in equipment damage.

2-2
 Connections to Peripheral Devices

Connections to Peripheral Devices

Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.

Power supply

Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter

Magnetic con-
tactor (MC)

AC reactor for power

factor improvement

Input noise filter

DC reactor for power

factor improvement

Inverter

Ground

Output noise filter

Motor

Ground

Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices

2-3
 Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.

When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.

SKDVH SRZHU
 WR  9
 +]

0XOWLIXQFWLRQ DQDORJXH
RXWSXW   WR 9

0XOWLIXQFWLRQ DQDORJXH
RXWSXW   WR 9

Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram

2-4
 Connection Diagram

‹ Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in the diagram on the previous page.
• These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation.
• These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and
reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-SELV
circuits, but not both.
• Inverter supplied by four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) circuits and are separated from all other circuits
by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be
interconnected with other SELV (or equivalent) circuits. These circuits can be accessible or intercon-
nected with other accessible SELV circuits.
• Inverter supplied by three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)
These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation, but only with basic
insulation. These circuits cannot be accessed and must not be interconnected with any circuits which
are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation.

1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.

IMPORTANT

2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set parameter L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resis-
tor Unit. If this user parameter is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop within
deceleration time.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with sin-
gle circles.
5. Sequence input signals S1 to S7 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V
external power supply, refer toTable 2.11.
6. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
7. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, current
meter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control pur-
pose.
8. DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400
V Class Inverters for 22 to 160 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Remove the short bar when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using an optional braking resistor unit and braking unit. When using this,
a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.

2-5
 Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW shown above)

Control
circuit
terminals
Charge indicator

Main
circuit
terminals

Ground terminal

Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter for 22 kW)

2-6
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

‹ Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connector

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to users manual
(I526-E1-†) for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.

Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Recom-
Inverter Tightening Possible mended
Termial Wire Sizes Wire Size
Model Terminal Symbol Screws
Torque Wire Type
3G3PV- (N•m) mm2(AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
2 to 5.5 2
A2004-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

2 to 5.5 2
A2007-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

2 to 5.5 2
A2015-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

2 to 5.5 2
A2022-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

3.5 to 5.5 3.5
A2037-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(12 to 10) (12)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

5.5 5.5
A2055-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10) (10)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

8 to 14 8
A2075-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
(8 to 6) (8) Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, power cables
14 to 22 14
A2110-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
(6 to 4) (6)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30

M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3 (4 to 2) (4)
A2150-E
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3 (3 to 2) (3)
A2185-E
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 60 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3 to 1) (3)
A2220-E 8 to 22
B2220-E 3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
A2300-E 8 to 22
B2300-E 3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)

2-7
 Recom-
Inverter Tightening Possible mended
Termial Wire Sizes Wire Size
Model Terminal Symbol Screws
Torque Wire Type
3G3PV- (N•m) mm2(AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 60 to 100 60
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
5.5 to 22
A2370-E 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 4)
B2370-E 30 to 60 30
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 80 to 100 80
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0)
5.5 to 22
A2450-E 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 4)
B2450-E 38 to 60 38
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1 to 2/0) (1)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
50 to 100 50 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
100 100
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(4/0) (4/0)
A2550-E 5.5 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
B2550-E (10 to 2/0)
30 to 60 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3 to 4/0) (1/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 125 80 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 × 2P)
80 to 100 80 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P) Power cables,
A2750-E 5.5 to 60 e.g., 600 V vinyl
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
B2750-E (10 to 2/0) power cables
100 to 200 100
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 400) (3/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
150 to 200 150 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(250 to 400) (250 × 2P)
100 to 150 100 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 × 2P)
A2900-E 5.5 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
B2900-E (10 to 2/0)
60 to 150 60 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
200 × 2P
or 50 × 4P
200 to 325
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2 (350 × 2P
(350 to 600)
or 1/0 ×
2P)
150 × 2P
or 50 × 4P
150 to 325
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M12 31.4 to 39.2 (300 × 2P
B211K (300 to 600)
or 1/0 ×
4P)
5.5 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 2/0)
150 150 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(300) (300 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C

2-8
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes

Recom-
Inverter Termi- Tightening Possible mended
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type
3G3PV- Screws
(N•m) mm2 (AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
2 to 5.5 2
A4004-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

2 to 5.5 2
A4007-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

2 to 5.5 2
A4015-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,

2 to 5.5 2
A4022-E U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, 3.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 to 5.5 (12)
A4037-E M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 to 5.5 (12)
A4040-E M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, 3.5 to 5.5 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (12 to 10) (12)
A4055-E M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5 2
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, 5.5
5.5(10) Power cables,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10)
A4075-E M4 1.2 to 1.5 e.g., 600 V vinyl
3.5 to 5.5 3.5
power cables
(12 to 10) (12)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, 8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 5.5 to 14 (8)
A4110-E M5 2.5
(10 to 6) 5.5
(10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, 8 to 14 8
M5 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (8 to 6) (8)
A4150-E
M5 2.5 5.5 to 14 5.5
(M6) (4.0 to 5.0) (10 to 6) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 8 to 38 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3 (8 to 2) (8)
A4185-E
8 to 22 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(8 to 4) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2, 14 to 22 14
M6 4.0 to 5.0
A4220-E W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (6 to 4) (6)
B4220-E 14 to 38 14
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(6 to 2) (6)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2, 22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
A4300-E W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4) (4)
B4300-E 22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 22 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4 to 1/0) (2)
A4370-E 8 to 22
B4370-E 3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)

2-9
 Recom-
Inverter Termi- Tightening Possible mended
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type
3G3PV- Screws
(N•m) mm2 (AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 38 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2 to 1/0) (2)
A4450-E 8 to 22
B4450-E 3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
A4550-E 8 to 22
B4550-E 3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
60 to 100 60
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
50 to 100 50
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0)
A4750-E 5.5 to 22
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
B4750-E (10 to 4)
38 to 60 38
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 100 100
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
80 to 100 100
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
A4900-E 8 to 22
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
B4900-E (8 to 4)
50 to 100 50
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1 to 4/0) (1)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
50 to 100 50 × 2P Power cables,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P) e.g., 600 V vinyl
50 to 100 50 × 2P power cables
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
A411K-E 8 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
B411K-E (8 to 2/0)
60 to 150 600
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 100 80 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P)
60 to 100 60 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0 × 2P)
8 to 60
A413K-E 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
B413K-E
100 to 150 100
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 300) (4/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
100 to 200 100 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 400) (4/0 × 2P)
80 to 200 80 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 400) (3/0 × 2P)
A416K-E 80 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
B416K-E (8 to 2/0)
50 to 150 50 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 300) (1/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.

2-10
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)

Wire Thickness (mm2) Terminal Screws Size

M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.5
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.75
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
1.25
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 2 to 3.5
M4 2 to 4
2 M5 2 to 5
M6 2 to 6
M8 2 to 8
M4 5.5 to 4
M5 5.5 to 5
3.5/5.5
M6 5.5 to 6
M8 5.5 to 8
M5 8 to 5
8 M6 8 to 6
M8 8 to 8
M6 14 to 6
14
M8 14 to 8
M6 22 to 6
22
M8 22 to 8
30/38 M8 38 to 8
M8 60 to 8
50/60
M10 60 to 10
80 80 to 10
M10
100 100 to 10
100 100 to 12
150 M12 150 to 12
200 200 to 12
M12 x 2 325 to 12
325
M16 325 to 16

Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:

Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
IMPORTANT

2-11
 ‹ Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the termi-
nals correctly for the desired purposes.

Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Model: 3G3PV-
Purpose Terminal Symbol
200 V Class 400 V Class
A2004-E to A2900-E A4004-E to A416K-E
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
B2220-E to B211K-E B4220-E to B416K-E
Main circuit power input
A2220-E to A2900-E A4220-E to A416K-E
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
B2220-E to B211K-E B4220-E to B416K-E
A2004-E to A2900-E A4004-E to A416K-E
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B2220-E to B211K-E B4220-E to B416K-E
A2004-E to A2900-E A4004-E to A416K-E
DC power input 1,
B2220-E to B211K-E B4220-E to B416K-E

DC reactor connection 1, 2 A2004-E to A2185-E A4004-E to A4185-E

A2004-E to A2900-E A4220-E to A416K-E

Braking Unit connection 3,
B2220-E to B211K-E B4220-E to B416K-E
A2004-E to A2900-E A4004-E to A416K-E
Ground
B2220-E to B211K-E B4220-E to B416K-E

2-12
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

‹ Main Circuit Configurations

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5.

Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations

200 V Class 400 V Class

3G3PV-A2004-E to A2185-E 3G3PV-A4004-E to A4185-E

Power Control Power Control

supply circuits supply circuits

3G3PV-A2220-E,A2300-E 3G3PV-A4220-E to A4550-E

3G3PV-B2220-E,B2300-E 3G3PV-B4220-E to B4550-E

Power Control
Power Control supply circuits
supply circuits

3G3PV-A2370-E to A2900-E 3G3PV-A4750-E to A416K-E

3G3PV-B2370-E to B211K-E 3G3PV-B4750-E to B416K-E

Power Control
Power Control supply circuits
supply circuits

Note 1. Consult your OMRON representative before using 12-phase rectification.

2-13
 ‹ Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.

3G3PV-A2004-E to A2185-E,A4004-E toA4185-E 3G3PV-A2220-E, A2300-E, A4220-E to A4550-E

3G3PV-B2220-E, B2300-E, B4220-E to B4550-E
Braking Resistor
DC reactor Unit (optional)
(optional) Braking Resistor
Braking Unit
(optional) Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)

3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)

Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC

reactor. The DC reactor is built in.

3G3PV-A2370-E to A2900-E 3G3PV-A4750-E to A416K-E

3G3PV-B2370-E to B211K-E 3G3PV-B4750-E to B416K-E
Braking Resistor Braking Resistor
Unit (optional) Unit (optional)
Braking Unit Braking Unit
(optional) (optional)

3-phase 3-phase
200 VAC 400 VAC

Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections

2-14
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

‹ Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.

„Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.

Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

When connecting the power input terminals (R/L2, S/L2 and T/L3) and power supply via a molded-case cir-
cuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
120% of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence, that the
powersupply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown below.

Inverter

Power supply

Fault out-
put (NC)

* For 400-V class Inverters, connect a 400/200-V transformer.

Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation

Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the
Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range
that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
• For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sen-
sitivity amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amper-
age of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.

2-15
 • When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If a Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit are used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contac-
tor is turned OFF by the contact of the Braking Resistor Unit's thermal overload relay.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.

Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the con-
verter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac-
tor connection terminals (for units from 22 kW the DC reactor is standard).
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include mag-
netic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids and magnetic brakes.

Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side

Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation

Power supply 3G3PV

Noise
filter Inverter
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.
†
Ordinary: 3G3EV-PLNFD /3G3IV-PFN †
Other
controllers
EMC compatible: 3G3RV-PFI †

Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation.

2-16
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation

3G3PV
Power supply

Inverter

General- Other
purpose
controllers
noise filter

Power supply
3G3PV

General-
purpose Inverter
noise filter
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No general
purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.
Other
controllers

Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise filter Installation.

„Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.

Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 to motor lead wires U, V and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output termi-
nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output
terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas-
ing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.

Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency
components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage
to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.

2-17
 Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during
operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be caused and the
overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.
When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before operating the
MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power
interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC.

Installing a Thermal Overload Relay

This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.

Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side

Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.

3G3PV 3G3IV-PLF
Noise
Inverter Filter

Powersupply Radio noise

Inductive noise AM radio

Signal line

Controller

Inductive noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.

Fig 2.9 Installing a noise filter on the output side

Countermeasures against Inductive Noise

As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the out-
put side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keep-
ing the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.

3G3PV Metal pipe

Inverter

Power supply
30cm min.
Signal line
Controller

Fig 2.10 Countermeasures against Inductive noise

2-18
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both, input and output, sides and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.

Steel box
Metal pipe

Noise Noise
Inverter
Filter Filter
Power supply

Fig 2.11 Countermeasures against Radio Interference

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, caus-
ing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 Parameter
Tables.)

Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency 15 kHz max. 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max.

„Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 W and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 W.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and
the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

OK NO

Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring

2-19
 „Connecting an optional Braking Resistor Unit (3G3IV-PLKB) and Braking Unit (3G3IV-
PCDBR)
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.13.
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal over-
load relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.13.

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output

3G3IV-PCD- 3G3IV-PLKB †
BR † Braking Braking Resis-
Unit tor Unit

1
Thermal protector
Inverter
trip contact

Thermal overload
relay trip contact

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output

3G3IV-PCD- †
†
3G3IV-PLKB
BR Braking Braking Resistor
Unit Unit

Thermal protector
Inverter trip contact

Thermal overload
relay trip contact

Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit

When using an optional Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit, the parameter L3-04 (Stall prevention
selection during deceleration) has to be set to 0. Otherwise stall prevention is enabled and the Braking Unit
will not work.

IMPORTANT

2-20
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2.14.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).

Braking resistor overheating con- Braking resistor overheating con- Braking resistor overheating con-
tacts (Thermal protector contacts) tacts (Thermal protector contacts) tacts (Thermal protector contacts)

Braking Braking
Braking Resistor Resistor
Resistor Unit Unit
Unit

Inverter
detector
Level

Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3

Braking Unit #1
Cooling fin overheating con- Cooling fin overheating con- Cooling fin overheating con-
tacts (thermostat contacts) tacts (thermostatic contacts) tacts (thermostatic contacts)

Fig 2.14 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

Breaking Unit Application Precautions

When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor.

2-21
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

‹ Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or oper-
ation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.

E (G) Shield terminal

2 kΩ

Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA

2 kΩ 0 to +10 V
Master speed reference, 0 to +10 V (20 kΩ)
External
frequency 4 to 20 mA
Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/0 to +10 V (20 kΩ)
reference

Fig 2.15

Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.7.

Table 2.7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes

Recom-
Termi- Tightening Possible
mended
Terminals nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Type
Wire Size
Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2(AWG)

FM, AC, AM, SC, A1, Single wire*3:

A2, +V, –V, SN, SC, SP, 0.14 to 2.5
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, Phoenix Stranded 0.75 • Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
0.5 to 0.6
S7, MA, MB, MC, M1, type wire: (18) • Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
M2, M3, M4 0.14 to 1.5 ered, vinyl sheath cable
R+, R-, S+, S-, IG (26 to 14) (KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)

E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 1.25

(20 to 14) (12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805, 200-V and 400-V class) for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

2-22
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

„ Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines

Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.

Table 2.8 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Wire Size mm2 (AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer

0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14 Phoenix Contact
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14

Fig 2.16 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

„Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver

Control circuit
terminal block

Strip the end for

7 mm if no sold-
erless terminal
is used. Solderless terminal or wire 3.5 mm max.
without soldering
Wires Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

Fig 2.17 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block

2-23
 ‹ Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.9. Use the appropriate terminals for the cor-
rect purposes.
Table 2.9 Control Circuit Terminals
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 External fault input*1 Fault when ON.
S4 * Reset when ON
Fault reset
Se- Multi-step speed reference Functions are 24 VDC, 8 mA
quence Auxiliary frequency ref- Photo coupler isolation
input S5 1*1 erence when ON.
selected by set-
signals ting H1-01 to
(Master/auxiliary switch)
H1-05.
Multi-step speed reference Multi-step setting 2 when
S6
2*1 ON.
S7 Jog frequency reference*1 Jog frequency when ON.
SC Sequence input common – –
15 V
+V 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references
(Max. current: 20 mA)
–15 V
–V –15 V power output not used
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1 Frequency reference 0 to +10 V/100% 0 to +10 V(20 kΩ)
Analog
input Function is
signals 4 to 20 mA/100% 4 to 20 mA(250Ω)
A2 Multi-function analog input selected by set-
0 to +10 V/100% 0 to +10 V(20kΩ)
ting H3-09.
AC Analog reference common – –
Shield wire, optional ground
E(G) – –
line connection point

M1
Running signal
Operating when ON.
(1NO contact) Dry contacts
M2
Multi-function Contact capacity:
contact outputs 1 A max. at 250 VAC
Se- M3
Zero level (b2-01) or 1 A max. at 30 VDC
quence Zero speed
output below when ON
signals M4

MA Dry contacts
MB Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Contact capacity:
Fault output signal (SPDT)
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC 1 A max. at 250 VAC
MC 1 A max. at 30 VDC
Multi-function analog output 0 to +10 V/100% fre- Multi-function
FM
(frequency output) quency analog monitor 1
Analog 0 to +10 V max. ±5%
output AC Analog common (copy) –
signals 2 mA max.
Multi-function analog output 5 V/Inverter's rated cur- Multi-function
AM
(current monitor) rent analog monitor 2
R+ Differential input, PHC
communications input
R- For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well isolation
RS-
485/ S+ as R- and S-. Differential input, PHC
422 communications output
S- isolation
IG Signal common - -

* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1
for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.

2-24
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

„DIP Switch S1 and Shunt Connector CN15

The DIP switch S1 and shunt connector CN 15 of the optional terminal board (3G3PV-PETC618120) are
described in this section.

S1
OFF ON Terminating resistance*
V I Analog input A2 switch
: Factory settings
CN15 Analog output switch**
Voltage output
Current output

S1
CN15

* Note: Refer to Table 2.10 for S1 functions.

**Note: CN15 is not available at the standard terminal board.
An optional terminal board with CN15 Shunt Connector is available.
The standard setting is voltage output.

Fig 2.18 DIP Switch S1 and Shunt Connector CN15

The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.

Table 2.10 DIP Switch S1

Name Function Setting
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resis- OFF: No terminating resistance
S1-1
tance ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω

OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)

S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)

„ Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24V
common) by using the terminals SN, SC and SP. An external power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.

2-25
 Table 2.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode External Power Supply – Sinking Mode

Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode

2-26
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

‹ Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.19.

FM Multi-function analog
output 1
Optional

Multi-function analog
output 2
AM

Fig 2.19 Control Circuit Terminal Connections

2-27
 ‹ Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, 1, 2 and 3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3 and M4 (contact outputs) from
wiring to other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process
cable ends as shown in Fig 2.20.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.

Shield sheath Armor

Do not connect here.

Connect to shield sheath ter-
minal at Inverter (terminal E Insulate with tape
(G))

Fig 2.20 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables

2-28
 Wiring Check

Wiring Check

‹ Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform
the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?

2-29
 Installing and Wiring Option Cards

‹ Option Card Models and Specifications

One Option Card can be mounted in the Inverter as shown in Fig 2.21.
Table 2.12 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.

Table 2.12 Option Card and their Specifications

Mounting Loca-
Card Model Specifications
tion
Device Net Communications 3G3FV-
PDRT1-SIN
Deficient communications support C
Card

‹ Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front
cover and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slot C.

„ Preventing C Option Card Connectors from Rising

After installing an Option Card into slot C, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from
rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it
out.

CN2
C Option Card connector

C Option Card mounting spacer

Option clip C Option Card
(to prevent raising of
C Option Card)

Fig 2.21 Mounting Option Cards

2-30
 3
Chapter 3
Digital Operator and
Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.

Digital Operator.....................................................................3-2
Modes ....................................................................................3-5
 Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.The key names and functions of
the Digital Operator are described below.

Digital Operator with LED Display (3G3IV-PJVOP161)

Drive Mode Indicators
FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command
input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command
input.
SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.

Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers and
settings.

Mode Display
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
AUTO : Lit in Autotuning Mode.
TUNING
Keys

Execute operations such as setting user parame-

ters, monitoring, jogging and autotuning.

Digital Operator with LCD Display (3G3IV-PJVOP160)

Drive Mode Indicators

FWD:Lit when there is a forward run command
input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command
input.
SEQ:Lit when the run command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF:Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM:Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers and
settings.

Keys
Execute operations such as setting user parame-
ters, monitoring, jogging and autotuning.

Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions

3-2
 Digital Operator

‹ Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key Name Function

Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and

LOCAL/REMOTE Key control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user parameter o2-01.

MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).

ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.

Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
JOG Key
Digital Operator.

Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
FWD/REV Key
operated from the Digital Operator.

Sets the number of digits for user parameter settings.

Digit Selection/RESET Key
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.

Selects menu items, sets user parameter numbers and increments set
Increment Key values.
Used to move to the next item or data.

Selects menu items, sets user parameter numbers and decrements set
Decrement Key values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.

Pressed to enter menu items, user parameters and set values.

ENTER Key
Also used to switch from one screen to another.

Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by

RUN Key
the Digital Operator.

Stops Inverter operation.

STOP Key This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user parameter o2-02.

Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.

3-3
 There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.

Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators

3-4
 Modes

Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.

‹ Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it
easier to read and set user parameters.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.

Table 3.2 Modes

Mode Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Drive mode Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur-
rent, displaying fault information or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user parameters to operate the
Quick programming mode
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all user parameters.
Use this mode to read/set user parameters that have been changed from their fac-
Verify mode
tory-set values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters in the vector
Autotuning mode* control mode. The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.

*Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning Mode will not be displayed during operation or when an
error has occurred.

3-5
 ‹ Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the ENTER key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the
setting display.

Power ON

Drive Mode
(Operation possible)

Quick
Program ming M ode

Advanced
Program ming M ode

Verify Mode
When returning from a setting
display, the rightmost digit
of the monitor display will
flash.
Autotuning If a user constant is changed
Mode the num ber w ill be displayed.

Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays

Lit Flashing Not lit

Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions

3-6
 Modes

‹ Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting dis-
play. Use the Increment, Decrement and Digit Selection/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user
parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER key is pressed after
changing the setting.

„Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.

Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode

The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned
ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IMPORTANT

3-7
 ‹ Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement and Digit Selection/
RESET keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be
returned to when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in Quick Programming Mode.

„Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor display Setting Display

Quick Programming Mode Reference selection

Operation Method selection

Stopping Method selection

Terminal FM Gain

Terminal AM Gain

Motor Protection selection

Decelaration stall selection

Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode

3-8
 Modes

‹ Advanced Programming Mode

In advanced programming mode, all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.
parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement and Digit Selection/
RESET keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the display will return to moni-
tor display when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details on the parameters.

„Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.

Mode Selection display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

Advanced Programming Mode Setup settings Language

Access level

Initialize

PI controlbox: b5-xx PI Control mode selection

Proportional Gain

PI feedback command
loss detection time

Copy functions: o3-xx

Copy function selection

Read permitted selection

Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode

3-9
 „Setting Parameters
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.

Table 3.3 Setting User parameters in Advanced Programming Mode

Step
Digital Operator Display Description
No.

1 Power supply turned ON.

2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.

MENU Key pressed to enter quick program-

3 ming mode.

MENU Key pressed to enter advanced pro-

4
gramming mode.

5 ENTER pressed to access monitor display.

Increment or Decrement Key pressed to dis-

6
play C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).

ENTER Key pressed to access setting display.

7
The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is displayed.

Digit Selection/RESET Key pressed to

8
move the flashing digit to the right.

Increment Key pressed to change set value to

9
20.00 s.

ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.

10 “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the
entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.

11 The monitor display for C1-01 returns.

3-10
 Modes

‹ Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a pro-
gramming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement and Digit Selection/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user
parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER key is pressed after
changing the setting.

„Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

Frequency reference Frequency reference

Verify Mode selection selection

Acceleration time 1 Acceleration time 1

Input voltage setting Input voltage setting

Motor rated current Motor rated current

Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode

3-11
 ‹ Autotuning Mode

Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motorparameters when operating in the open-loop or
flux vector control modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When the motor can not be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your dealer to
set motorparameters by calculation.
The Inverter’s autotuning function automatically determines the motor parameters, while a servo system’s
autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotunig functions are fundamentally different.

„Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW) and rated current specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press
the RUN key. The motor is automatically run and the motor line-to-line resistance measured based on these
settings will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement and Digit Selection/
RESET keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the display will be returned to moni-
tor display when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.

Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display

Autotuning Motor output power Motor output power

Motor rated current Motor rated current

Autotuning start* Autotuning Stop command input

Autotuning completed

Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode

If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 .

IMPORTANT

3-12
 4
Chapter 4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.

Trial Operation Flowchart .....................................................4-3

Trial Operation Procedures....................................................4-4
Adjustment Suggestions ......................................................4-13
 Cautions and warnings

Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal
WARNING covers, bottom cover, Operator and optional items. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.

Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator or
WARNING optional items while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in elec-
trical shock or damage to the product

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result
WARNING in electrical shock.

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied. Doing
WARNING so may result in electrical shock.

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because
WARNING the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result
in injury.
Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary
power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be con-
WARNING tinued in the processing selection function after momentary power is reset).
Doing so may result in injury.
Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Oper-
WARNING ator is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may
result in injury.
Be sure to confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before tuning ON the
WARNING power supply, resetting the alarm or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector.
Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON my result in injury.
Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before opera-
Caution tion because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not
doing so may result in damage to the product.

Provide a separate holding brake when neccessary. Not doing so may result in
Caution injury.

Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury
Caution or damage to the product.

Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to

Caution the product.

4-2
 Trial Operation Flowchart

Trial Operation Flowchart

Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic parameters, always
set C6-01 (Heavy/Normal Duty Selection) according to the application.

S TA R T

In s ta lla tio n

W irin g

*1
Set power supply voltage.

Turn ON power

Confirm status

Select operating Basic settings

method. (Quick programming mode)

Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz (400V/50Hz)

Motor cable over

50 m or heavy load possibly YES
causing motor to stall or
overload?

NO
Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only

Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)

No-load operation

Loaded operation

O p tim u m a d justm e nts a nd

parameter settings

Check/record parameters

END

*1. Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.

Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart

4-3
 Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for the trial operation is described in order in this section.

‹ Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter. The unit is designed for using with:
• Fan, blower, pump applications

‹ Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or

Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply
voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.

Power tab

Jumper (factory-set position)

200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator

Fig 4.2 Large-capacity Inverter Connections

‹ Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status).

4-4
 Trial Operation Procedures

‹ Checking the Display Status

If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:

Display for normal operation The frequency reference monitor is dis-

played in the data display section.

When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.

The display will differ depending on the

Display for fault operation type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.

4-5
 ‹ Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then
set the following parameters.
Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5
Parameters and Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by Function for details on the parameters.
Table 4.1 Parameters that must be set
Class l : Must be set. O : Set as required.

Parame-
Setting Factory
Class ter Num- Name Description Page
Range Setting
ber
Set the frequency reference input
method.
5-8
0: Digital Operator
Reference selec- 6-4
l b1-01 1: Control circuit terminal (analog 0 to 3 1
tion 6-46
input)
6-54
2: RS-422A/485 communications
3: Option Card
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator 5-8
Operation 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence 6-8
l b1-02 0 to 3 1
method selection input) 6-46
2: RS-422A/485 communications 6-54
3: Option Card
Select stopping method when stop com-
mand is sent.
Stopping method 0: Deceleration to stop 5-8
O b1-03 0 to 3 0
selection 1: Coast to stop 6-10
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Set the acceleration time in seconds for
Acceleration time 5-13
l C1-01 the output frequency to climb from 0% to 0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
1 6-17
100%.
Set the deceleration time in seconds for
Deceleration time 5-13
l C1-02 the output frequency to fall from 100% to 0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
1 6-17
0%.

The carrier frequency is set low if the

Carrier fre-
O C6-02 motor cable is 50 m or longer or to 0 to D, F F 5-15
quency selection
reduce radio noise or leakage current.

d1-01 to
Frequency refer-
d1-01 to d1-04:
ences 1 to 4 and Set the required speed references for 5-16
O d1-04 and 0 to 120.00 Hz 0.00 Hz
jog frequency ref- multi-step speed operation or jogging. 6-6
d1-17 d1-17:
erence
6.00 Hz
200 V
155 to 255 V (200 V
Input voltage set- Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage (200 V class) class) 5-18
l E1-01
ting in volts. 310 to 510 V 400 V 6-74
(400 V class) (400 V
class)

4-6
 Trial Operation Procedures

Table 4.1 Parameters that must be set (Continued)

Class l : Must be set. O : Set as required.

Parame-
Setting Factory
Class ter Num- Name Description Page
Range Setting
ber
Setting for
general-
10% to 200% purpose 5-19
Motor rated cur-
l E2-01 Set the motor rated current. of Inverter's motor of 6-33
rent
rated current same 6-73
capacity
as Inverter
H4-02:
H4-02
FM and AM ter- Adjust when an instrument is connected 1.00
O and H4- 0.00 to 2.50 5-24
minal output gain to the FM or AM terminal. H4-05:
05
0.50
Set to enable or disable the motor over-
load protection function using the elec-
Motor protection 5-26
l L1-01 tronic thermal relay. 0 or 1 1
selection 6-33
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
If using the dynamic brake option (Brak-
Stall prevention
ing Resistor Units and Braking Units), be 5-28
O L3-04 selection during 0 to 2 1
sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 (dis- 6-21
deceleration
abled).

‹ Selecting the V/f pattern

• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to D) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
Simple operaton of a general-pupose motor
at 50 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 0
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 50 Hz
• Perform autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual
installation or when the load causes stalling.

4-7
 ‹ Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long or the cable length has changed
or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
To perform autotuning set parameters T1-02 and T1-04 and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator.
The Inverter will supply power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resis-
tance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured

Power will be supplied to the motor when autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do
not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.

IMPORTANT

„ Parameter Settings for Autotuning

The following parameters must be set before autotuning.

Table 4.2 Parameter Settings before Autotuning

Param-
eter Setting Factory
Name Display
Num- Range Setting
ber
10% to 200% Same as
Motor out- Set the output power of the motor in
T1-02 of Inverter Inverter
put power Kilowatts.*1
rated output rated output
Same as
general-
10% to 200% purpose
Motor rated Set the rated current of the motor in
T1-04 of Inverter motor with
current Amps.*1 same
rated current
capacity as
Inverter
* 1. For a parameter-output motor, set the value at the base speed.

4-8
 Trial Operation Procedures

„Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.

Table 4.3 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display Description
Motor rated : T1-02

The autotuning start display will appear when all set-

tings through T1-04 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.

Autotuning started: TUn10

Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed

from the autotuning start display.

Autotuning Stop command input

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error

occurs during autotuning and error message will be
display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-10.

Autotuning completed

END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 min-

utes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.

4-9
 ‹ Application Settings
Parameters are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital
Operator). All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in
advanced programming mode.

„Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of
the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.

‹ No-load Operation
This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not con-
nected to the motor. To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it’s recommended to use
the LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the
SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applica-
tions, at which the machine only can be driven in one direction, check the motor rotation direction.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, con-
firm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be
taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.

Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).

4-10
 Trial Operation Procedures

‹ Loaded Operation

„Connecting the Load

• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.

„Operation using the Digital Operator

• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.

„ Checking Operating Status

• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not to high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-13 if hunting, vibration or other problems originating in the
control system occur.

„Check and Recording Parameters

Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check parameters that have
been changed for trial operation and record them in a parameter table.
Any parameters that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in parameters o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can
be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed
settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage parameters.
• Recording parameters
• Setting access levels for parameters
• Setting a password

„ Recording parameters (o2-03)

If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of parameters will be saved in a separate mem-
ory area in the Inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the parameters can be
initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.

„Parameter Access Levels (A1-01)

A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent parameters from being changed. If A1-01 is set to 2
(advanced programming) all parameters can be read or written.

4-11
 „Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that parameters will be
displayed only when the correct password is input.

4-12
 Adjustment Suggestions

Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used parameters.

Table 4.4 Adjusted parameters

Recom-
Name (Parameter Factory
Performance mended Adjustment Method
Number) Setting
Setting
• Reduce the setting if
Controlling hunting torque is insufficient for
Hunting-prevention and vibration in mid- heavy loads.
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
gain (N1-02) dle-range speeds (10 to • Increase the setting if hunt-
40 Hz) ing or vibration occurs for
light loads.
• Increase the setting if
• Reducing motor motor magnetic noise is
Carrier frequency magnetic noise Depends high.
0 to
selection • Controlling hunting on capac- • Reduce the setting if hunt-
default
(C6-02) and vibration at low ity ing or vibration occurs at
speeds low to middle-range
speeds.
• Reduce the setting if
• Increasing torque
Torque compensation Depends torque or speed response is
and speed response 200 to 1000
primary delay time on capac- slow.
• Controlling hunting ms
parameter (C4-02) ity • Increase the setting if hunt-
and vibration
ing or vibration occurs.
• Increase the setting if
• Improving torque at
torque is insufficient at
low speeds (10 Hz
Torque compensation low speeds.
or lower) 1.00 0.50 to 1.50
gain (C4-01) • Reduce the setting if hunt-
• Controlling hunting
ing or vibration occurs for
and vibration
light loads.
Middle output fre-
• Increase the setting if
quency voltage • Improving torque at Depends Default to torque is insufficient at
(E1-08) low speeds on capac- Default + 3 low speeds.
Minimum output fre- • Controlling shock at ity and
quency voltage startup voltage to 5 V* • Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
(E1-10)
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.

The following parameter will also affect the control system indirectly.

Table 4.5 Parameters Affecting Control and Applications Indirectly

Name (Parameter Number) Application
Acceleration/deceleration times
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
(C1-01 to C1-11)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 and C2-02) Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04) Used to avoid resonance points during acceleration or deceleration.
Used to prevent OV (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06) default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using a
braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by
setting L3-04 to 0.

4-13
 5
Chapter 5
Parameters
This chapter describes all parameters that can be set in the Inverter.

Parameter Descriptions..........................................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..................5-3
Parameter Tables ...................................................................5-7
 Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the parameters tables.

‹ Description of Parameter Tables

Parameters tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Name Change
Param- RS-422A-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Regis- Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number ter
tion

Reference Set the frequency reference

selection input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
b1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q 180H -
(analog input)
2: RS-422A/485 communi-
Reference cations
Source
3: Option Card

• Parameter Number: The number of the parameter.

• Name: The name of the parameter.
• Description: Details on the function or settings of the parameter.
• Setting Range: The setting range for the parameter.
• Factory Setting: The factory setting.

• Change during Operation: Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
• Access Level: Indicates the access level in which the user parameter can be moni-
tored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick program-
ming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced pro-
gramming mode.
• RS-422A/485 Register: The register number used for R-S422A/485 communications.
• Page: Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.

5-2
 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.

No. Function Display Page

MENU Drive Mode U1 Status Monitor Parameters Monitor 5-37

U2 Fault Trace Fault Trace 5-40
Inverter can be operated and
U3 Fault History Fault History 5-42
its status can be displayed.
A1 Initialize Mode Initialization 5-7
A2 User set parameters NOT USED -
b1 Operation Mode Selections Sequence 5-8
b2 DC Injection Braking DC Braking 5-9
Quick Programming Mode b3 Speed Search Speed Search 5-10

Minimum parameters required b5 PI Control PI Control 5-11

for operation can be monitored b8 Energy Saving Energy Saving 5-12
or set. C1 Acceleration/Deceleration Accel/Decel 5-13
C2 S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration S-curve Accel/Decel 5-14
C4 Torque Compensation Torque Comp 5-14
C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 5-15
d1 Preset Reference Preset Reference 5-16

Advanced Programming Mode d2 Reference Limits Reference Limits 5-16

d3 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequencies 5-17
All parameters can be moni- d6 Field Weakening Field Weakening 5-17
tored or set.
E1 V/f Pattern V/f Pattern 5-18
E2 Motor Setup Motor Setup 5-19
F6 Communications Option Card CP-916 Setup 5-19
H1 Multi-function Contact Inputs Digital Inputs 5-20
H2 Multi-function Contact Outputs Digital Outputs 5-21
H3 Analog Inputs Analog Inputs 5-22
Verify Mode H4 Multi-function Analog Outputs Analog Outputs 5-24
Parameters changed from the H5 RS-422A/485 Communications Serial Com Setup 5-25
default settings can be moni- L1 Motor Overload Motor Overload 5-26
tored or set.
L2 Power Loss Ridethrough PwrLoss Ridethru 5-27
L3 Stall Prevention Stall Prevention 5-28
L4 Reference Detection Ref Detection 5-29
L5 Fault Restart Fault Restart 5-29
L6 Torque Detection Torque Detection 5-30
Autotuning Mode L8 Hardware Protection Hdwe Protection 5-30
n1 Hunting Prevention Function Hunting Prev 5-32
Automatically sets motor n3 High-slip Braking High Slip 5-32
parameters if autotuning data
o1 Monitor Select Monitor Select 5-33
(from motor nameplate) is
input for measure the line-to- o2 Multi-function Selections Key Selections 5-35
line resistance. o3 Copy Function COPY Function 5-36

T Motor Autotuning Auto-Tuning 5-36

5-3
 ‹ Parameters Setable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These and all
other parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Reg-
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number ister
tion

Reference
selection Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
b1-01 1: Control circuit terminal (analog 0 to 3 1 No Q 180H
input)
Reference
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Source 3: Option Card

Operation
method selec-
tion Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
b1-02 0 to 3 1 No Q 181H
input)
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Run Source 3: Option Card

Select stopping method when stop

command is input.
Stopping 0: Ramp to stop
method selec- 1: Coast to stop
tion
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
b1-03 0 to 3 0 No Q 182H
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run com-
Stopping mands are disregarded during
Method
deceleration time.)
Acceleration
time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds
C1-01 for the output frequency to climb from Yes Q 200H
Accel Time 1 0% to 100%. 0.0 to 6000.0
Deceleration
10.0 s
time 1
Set the deceleration time in seconds
C1-02 for the output frequency to fall from Yes Q 201H
Decel Time 1 100% to 0%.

Carrier fre-
quency selec-
tion Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
C6-02 Select F to enable detailed settings 1 to F 6 No Q 224H
using parameters C6-03 to C6-07.
Carrier-
FreqSel

5-4
 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Reg-
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number ister
tion

Frequency
reference 1
Set the frequency reference in the unit
specified in o1-03 (frequency units for 0.00
d1-01 Yes Q 280H
reference setting and monitor, default: Hz
Reference 1 Hz)

Frequency
reference 2 Frequency reference when multi-step
0.00
d1-02 speed command 1 is ON for a multi- Yes Q 281H
Hz
function input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Reference 2

Frequency
reference 3
0 to
Frequency reference when multi-step
50.00 0.00
d1-03 speed command 2 is ON for a multi- Yes Q 282H
Hz
Reference 3
function input (unit: Set in o1-03).

Frequency Frequency reference when multi-step

reference 4 speed command 1 and 2 are ON for a 0.00
d1-04 Yes Q 283H
multi-function input (unit: Set in o1- Hz
Reference 4 03).
Jog fre-
quency refer- Frequency reference when multi-func-
ence tion inputs „Jog Frequency Com- 6.00
d1-17 Yes Q 292H
mand“, „FJOG command“ or „RJOG Hz
Jog
Reference command“ is ON (unit: Set in o1-03).

Input voltage
setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in units 155 to
200 V
E1-01 of 1 volt. This set value will be the 255 No Q 300H
*2
Input Voltage
basis for the protection functions. *2

V/F pattern
selection 0 to D: Select from 14 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns 0 to D,
E1-03 F No Q 302H
(Applicable for setting E1-04 F
V/F Selection to E1-10).

Max. output
frequency
(FMAX) 0.0 to 50.0
E1-04 No Q 303H
Max 120.0 Hz
Frequency

Max.
voltage
(VMAX) Output voltage (V) 0.0 to 200.0
E1-05 VMAX 255.0 V No Q 304H
(E1-05)
Max *2 *2
Voltage VBASE
(E1-13)
Base
frequency Frequency
(FA) VMIN (Hz) 0.0 to 50.0
E1-06 No Q 305H
Base
(E1-10)
FMIN FA FMAX 120.0 Hz
Frequency (E 1 -0 9) (E1-06) (E1-04)

Min. output
frequency
(FMIN) 0.0 to
E1-09 1.5 Hz No Q 308H
120.0
Min.
Frequency

5-5
 Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Reg-
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number ister
tion

Motor rated Set the motor rated current in Amps.

current This set value becomes the base value 0.32 to
1.90 A
E2-01 for motor protection, torque limit and 6.40 No Q 30EH
*4
Motor Rated torque control. It is an input data for *5
FLA
autotuning.
Gain (termi- Set the voltage level gain for multi-
nal FM)
function analog output 1.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
0.0 to
H4-02 be output as the 100% output for the 100% Yes Q 41EH
1000.0
Terminal FM monitor items. Voltage output from
Gain
the terminals, however, have a 10 V
max. meter calibration function.

Gain (termi-
nal AM)
Set the voltage level gain for multi- 0.0 to
H4-05 50% Yes Q 421H
function analog output 2. 1000.0
Terminal AM
Gain

Set to enable or disable the motor

overload protection function using the
electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
Motor protec- In some applications when the Inver-
tion selection
ter power supply is turned off, the
L1-01 0 or 1 1 No Q 480H
thermal value is reset, so even if this
parameter is set to 1, protection may
not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
each motor is equipped with a protec-
MOL Fault
Select
tion device.

Stall preven- 0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If

tion selection
during decel- deceleration time is too short, a
eration main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
is returned.)
L3-04 0 to 2 1 No Q 492H
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
StallP Decel
Sel
(Deceleration rate is automatically
adjusted so that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is disre-
garded.)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Brak-
ing Unit) is used, always set to 0 to 2.

* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.

* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 3. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 4. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 5. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)

5-6
 Parameter Tables

Parameter Tables

‹ A: Setup Settings

„ Initialize Mode: A1
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Language
selection for
Used to select the language
Digital Opera- displayed on the Digital
tor display Operator Display.
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
A1-00 3: French 0 to 6 0 Yes A 100H –
Select Lan- 4: Italian
guage 5: Spanish
6: Portugese
This parameter is not initial-
ized by the initialize opera-
tion.
Used to set the parameter
Parameter access level (set/read.)
access level
0: Monitoring only (Moni-
toring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-
04.) 6-6
A1-01 0 or 2 2 Yes A 101H
2: Advanced 6-31
(Parameters can be read
Acces Level
and set in both, quick
programming mode (Q)
and advanced pro-
gramming (A) mode.)
Used to initialize the param-
Initialize
eters using the specified
method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
Parameters 0 to
A1-03 0 No A 103H –
2220: Initializes using a 3330
Init
Parameters two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
Password input when a pass-
Password word has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some parameters of the ini-
tialize mode. 0 to
A1-04 0 No A 104H 6-86
If the password is changed, 9999
Enter Pass-
word
A1-01 to A1-03 parameters
can no longer be changed.
(Programming mode param-
eters can be changed.)

5-7
 ‹ Application Parameters: b
The following settings are made with the application parameters (B parameters): Operation Method Selection,
DC injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions and energy saving functions.

„Operation Mode Selections: b1

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Reference Set the frequency reference

selection input method.
0: Digital Operator 4-6
1: Control circuit terminal 6-4
b1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q 180H
Reference-
(analog input) 6-46
Source 2: RS-422A/485 communi- 6-54
cations
3: Option Card
Operation Set the run command input
method selec-
tion method.
0: Digital Operator 4-6
1: Control circuit terminal 6-8
b1-02 0 to 3 1 No Q 181H
(sequence input) 6-46
Run Source 2:RS-422A/485 communi- 6-54
cations
3: Option Card
Used to set the stopping
Stopping method used when a stop
method selec-
tion command is input.
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
4-6
b1-03 (Stops faster than coast to 0 to 3 0 No Q 182H
6-10
stop, no regenerative ope-
Stopping ration.)
Method
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are dis-
regarded during decelera-
tion.)
Operation Used to set the operation
selection after
switching to
mode by switching to the
remote mode Remote mode using the
Local/Remote Key.
0: Run signals that are input
during mode switching
b1-07 are disregarded. (Input 0 or 1 0 No A 186H -
LOC/REM
Run signals after swit-
RUN Sel ching the mode.)
1: Run signals become
effective immediately
after switching to the
Remote mode.
Run com-
mand selec- Used to set an operation
tion in interlock in programming
programming modes.
modes
0: Cannot operate.
b1-08 0 or 1 0 No A 187H -
1: Can operate (Disabled
RUN CMD at when Digital Operator is
PRG
set to select run command
(when b1-02 = 0)).

5-8
 Parameter Tables

„DC Injection Braking: b2

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485Regist Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display er
tion
Zero speed
level (DC
Used to set the frequency at
injection brak- which DC injection braking
ing starting starts in units of Hz when
frequency)
deceleration to stop is
0.0 to
b2-01 selected. 0.5 Hz No A 189H 6-10
10.0
When b2-01 is less than E1-
DCInj Start
Freq 09, E1-09 becomes the DC
injection braking starting
frequency.
DC injection
braking cur- Sets the DC injection brak-
rent 0 to 6-10
b2-02 ing current as a percentage 50% No A 18AH
100 6-13
DCInj Current of the Inverter rated current.

DC injection Used to set the time to per-

braking time
at start form DC injection braking at
start in units of 1 second.
0.00
Used to stop coasting motor
b2-03 to 0.00 s No A 18BH 6-13
and restart it. When the set
DCInj 10.00
Time@Start value is 0, DC injection
braking at start is not per-
formed.
DC injection Used to set the time to per-
braking time
at stop form DC injection braking at
stop in units of 1 second.
0.00
Used to prevent coasting
b2-04 to 0.50 s No A 18CH 6-10
after the stop command is
DCInj 10.00
Time@Stop input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at
stop is not performed.

5-9
 „Speed Search: b3
Name Change RS-
Param-
Setting Factory during Access 422A/
eter- Description Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- level 485 Reg-
Number
tion ister
Speed
search Enables/disables the speed search
selection function for the RUN command
(current and sets the speed search method.
detection or
speed calcu- 0:Disabled, speed calculation
lation) 1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection

Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is per-
b3-01 0 to 3 2 No A 191H 6-38
formed from the calculated
speed to the specified frequency
SPDSrch at
Start
(motor direction is also sear-
ched).

Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the maxi-
mum frequency and the speed is
detected at the search current
level.
Speed
search oper- Sets the speed search operation
ating current current as a percentage, taking
(current the Inverter rated current as
detection)
100%. 0 to
b3-02 120% No A 192H 6-38
Not usually necessary to set. 200
SPDSrch When restarting is not possible
Current
with the factory settings, reduce
the value.
Speed
search Sets the output frequency decel-
deceleration eration time during speed search
time (cur- in 1-second units. 0.1 to
b3-03 rent detec- 2.0 s No A 193H 6-38
tion) Set the time for deceleration from 10.0
SPDScrh the maximum output frequency to
Dec Time the minimum output frequency.
Speed
search wait Sets the contactor operating delay
time (cur- time when there is a contactor on
rent detec- the output side of the Inverter.
tion or speed
calculation) When a speed search is per- 0.0 to
b3-05 0.2 s No A 195H 6-38
formed after recovering from a 20.0
Search momentary power loss, the
Delay search operation is delayed by the
time set here.

5-10
 Parameter Tables

„PI Control: b5
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

PI control
mode selec-
tion 0: Disabled
b5-01 0 to 1 0 No A 1A5H 6-66
1: Enabled
PI Mode

Proportional
gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain
0.00
as a percentage.
b5-02 to 1.00 Yes A 1A6H 6-66
PI Gain P-control is not performed when
25.00
the setting is 0.00.
Integral (I)
time
Sets I-control integral time in 1-
second units. 0.0 to
b5-03 1.0 s Yes A 1A7H 6-66
PI I Time I-control is not performed when 360.0
the setting is 0.0.
Integral (I)
limit
Sets the I-control limit as a per-
0.0 to
b5-04 centage of the maximum output 100.0% Yes A 1A8H 6-66
PI I Limit 100.0
frequency.
PI limit
Sets the limit after PI-control as a
0.0 to
b5-06 PI Limit
percentage of the maximum out- 100.0% Yes A 1AAH 6-66
100.0
put frequency.
PIPI offset
adjustment
Sets the offset after PI-control as -100.0
b5-07 a percentage of the maximum to 0.0% Yes A 1ABH 6-66
PI Offset output frequency. +100.0
PI primary
delay time
Sets the time parameter for low
parameter pass filter for PI-control outputs 0.00 to
b5-08 0.00 s Yes A 1ACH 6-66
in 1-second units. 10.00
PI Delay Time
Usually not necessary to set.
Selection of PI
feedback
0: No detection of loss of PI
command loss feedback.
detection 1: Detection of loss of PI feed-
back.
Operation continues during
detection, with the mal-
b5-12 0 to 2 0 No A 1B0H 6-66
functioning contact not opera-
Fb los Det Sel ting.
2: Detection of loss of PI feed-
back.
Coasts to stop during detec-
tion and fault contact operates.
PI feedback
command loss
Sets the PI feedback loss detec-
detection level tion level as a percent units, with 0 to
b5-13 0% No A 1B1H 6-66
the maximum output frequency at 100
Fb los Det Lvl
100%.
PI feedback
command loss
detection time Sets the PI feedback loss detec- 0.0 to
b5-14 1.0 s No A 1B2H 6-66
Fb los Det tion level in s units. 25.5
Time
PI sleep func-
tion operation Set the PI sleep function start 0.0 to
b5-15 level 0.0 Hz No A 1B3H 6-66
level as a frequency. 120.0
PI Sleep Level
PI sleep oper-
ation delay Set the delay time until the PI 0.0 to
b5-16 time 0.0 s No A 1B4H 6-66
sleep function starts in seconds. 25.5
PI Sleep Time

5-11
 Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Accel/decel
time for PI ref-
erence Set the accel/decel time for PI 0.0 to
b5-17 0.0 s No A 1B5H 6-66
PI Acc/Dec reference in seconds. 25.5
Time

„Energy Saving: b8
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Energy-sav-
ing mode
Select whether to enable or dis-
selection able energy-saving control.
b8-01 0 or 1 0 No A 1CCH –
Energy Save 0: Disable
Sel 1: Enable
Energy-sav-
Set the motor rated capacity in
ing coefficient 0.0 to
E2-11 and adjust the value by 5%
b8-04 655.00 *2 No A 1CFH –
Energy Save at a time until output power
COEF *1
reaches a minimum value.
Power detec-
tion filter time Set the time parameter for output
parameter 0 to
b8-05 power detection. 20 ms No A 1D0H –
2000
kW Filter Time

Search opera-
tion voltage
Set the limit value of the voltage
limiter control range during search oper-
ation. 0 to
b8-06 0% No A 1D1H –
Search V Set to 0 to disable the search 100
Limit operation. 100% is the motor
base voltage.
* 1. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters.
* 2. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.

5-12
 Parameter Tables

‹ Autotuning Parameters: C
The following settings are made with the autotuning parameters (C parameters): Acceleration/deceleration
times, S-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control and carrier frequency
functions

„Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Acceleration
time 1
Sets the acceleration time to
4-6
C1-01 accelerate from 0 to the Yes Q 200H
Accel Time 1 6-17
maximum output frequency.
Deceleration
time 1
Sets the deceleration time to
4-6
C1-02 decelerate from the maximum Yes Q 201H
Decel Time 1 6-17
output frequency to 0.
Acceleration
time 2
The acceleration time when the
0.0 to
C1-03 multi-function input “accel/decel 10.0 s Yes A 202H 6-17
Accel Time 2 6000.0
time 1” is set to ON.
Deceleration
time 2
The deceleration time when the
C1-04 multi-function input “accel/decel Yes A 203H 6-17
Decel Time 2 time 1” is set to ON.
Emergency
stop time
The deceleration time when the
C1-09 multi-function input “Emergency No A 208H 6-16
Fast Stop
Time (fast) stop” is set to ON.
Accel/decel Sets the frequency for automatic
time switch-
ing frequency acceleration/deceleration switch-
ing.
Below set frequency: Accel/decel
time 2 0.0 to
C1-11 0.0 Hz No A 20AH -
Above set frequency: Accel/decel 120.0
Acc/Dec SW
Freq time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” or “accel/decel time
2” has priority.

5-13
 „S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
S-curve
characteris- When the S-curve characteristic time
tic time at
accelera- is set, the accel/decel times will
0.00
tion start increase by only half of the S-curve
C2-01 to 0.20 s No A 20BH -
characteristic times at start and end.
2.50
SCrv Acc @ Run command OFF
Start
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
S-curve
characteris- C2-01
tic time at Time
accelera- 0.00
tion end
C2-02 to 0.20 s No A 20CH -
The S-curve characteristic time at
2.50
SCrv Acc @ start and end of deceleration is fixed
End
to 0.2 sec and can not be changed.

„Torque Compensation: C4
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Sets torque compensation gain as

a ratio.
Torque com-
pensation Usually setting is not necessary.
gain Adjust in the following circum-
stances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capac- 0.00 to 4-13
C4-01 1.00 Yes A 215H
ity (Max. applicable motor 2.50 6-27
capacity), increase the set
Torq Comp values.
Gain • When the motor is oscillating,
decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range at
minimum speed rotation so that it
does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Torque com-
pensation pri- The torque compensation delay
mary delay time is set in ms units.
time parame- Usually setting is not necessary.
ter
Adjust in the following circum-
stances: 0 to 4-13
C4-02 200 ms No A 216H
• When the motor is oscillating, 10000 6-27
Torq Comp increase the set values.
Time
• When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.

5-14
 Parameter Tables

„Carrier Frequency: C6
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Carrier fre-
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
quency 4-6
selection Select F to enable detailed settings 6
C6-02 1 to F No Q 224H 4-13
Carrier Freq using parameters C6-03 to C6-05. *1
6-2
Selection

Carrier fre-
quency
upper limit

0.4 to 15.0
C6-03 15.0 kHz No A 225H -
*2 *3 *1

Carrier Freq
Max Set the carrier frequency upper limit
and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as
follows:

Carrier fre-
quency
lower limit
Carrier frequency

0.4 to 15.0
C6-04 15.0 kHz No A 226H -
*2 *3 *1
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
Carrier Freq frequency
Min (Max. output frequency)

K is a coefficient that depends on the set-

ting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
Carrier fre- 10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
quency pro- 5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
portional
gain

00 to
C6-05 99 00 No A 227H -
*3

Carrier Freq
Gain

* 1. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.

* 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. This parameter can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.

5-15
 ‹ Reference Parameters: d

„Preset Reference: d1
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Frequency
reference 1
Sets the frequency reference in 0.00 4-7
d1-01 Yes Q 280H
the units used in o1-03. Hz 6-6
Reference 1

Frequency
reference 2 The frequency reference when
0.00 4-7
d1-02 multi-step speed command 1 is Yes Q 281H
Hz 6-6
Reference 2 ON for a multi-function input.

Frequency
reference 3 The frequency reference when
0 to 0.00 4-7
d1-03 multi-step speed command 2 is Yes Q 282H
50.00 Hz 6-6
Reference 3
ON for a multi-function input.

Frequency
reference 4
The frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1 and 0.00 4-7
d1-04 Yes Q 283H
2 are ON for multi-function Hz 6-6
Reference 4 inputs.

Jog fre-
quency refer- The frequency reference when
ence the jog frequency reference selec- 6.00 4-6
d1-17 Yes Q 292H
tion, FJOG command or RJOG Hz 6-48
Jog
Reference command is ON.

Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).

„Reference Limits: d2
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Frequency
reference Set the output frequency upper
upper limit 0.0 to
d2-01 limit as a percentage of the max. 100.0% No A 289H 6-26
Ref Upper 110.0
output frequency.
Limit
Frequency
reference Sets the output frequency lower
lower limit 0.0 to
d2-02 limit as a percentage of the maxi- 0.0% No A 28AH 6-26
Ref Lower 110.0
mum output frequency.
Limit
Master speed
reference Set the master speed reference
lower limit 0.0 to
d2-03 lower limit as a percentage of the 0.0% No A 293H 6-26
Ref1 Lower 110.0
max. output frequency.
Limit

5-16
 Parameter Tables

„Jump Frequencies: d3
Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
terNum- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
ber Display Register
tion

Jump fre-
quency 1

d3-01 0.0 Hz No A 294H 6-24

Jump Freq 1 Set the center values of the jump

frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by set-
Jump fre- ting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
quency 2 Always ensure that the following
applies: 0.0 to
d3-02 0.0 Hz No A 295H 6-24
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 120.0
Jump Freq 2 Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during
acceleration and deceleration, the
speed changes smoothly without
Jump fre-
quency 3 jumping.

d3-03 0.0 Hz No A 296H 6-24

Jump Freq 3

Jump fre-
quency width
Sets the jump frequency band-
width in Hz. 0.0 to
d3-04 1.0 Hz No A 297H 6-24
Jump The jump frequency range will be 20.0
Bandwidth
the jump frequency ± d3-04.

„Field Weakening: d6
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Set the Inverter output voltage

Field weaken- when the field weakening com-
ing level
mand is input.
It is enabled when the field weak-
0 to
d6-01 ening command is set for a multi- 80% No A 2A0H 6-28
100
function input.
Field-Weak
Lvl
Set the level as a percentage tak-
ing the voltage set in the V/f pat-
tern as 100%.

Field fre- Set the lower limit in Hz of the

quency frequency range where field con-
trol is valid.
The field weakening command is 0.0 to
d6-02 0.0 Hz No A 2A1H 6-28
valid only at frequencies above 120.0
Field-Weak
Freq this setting and only when the
speed is in agreement with the
current speed reference.

5-17
 ‹ Motor Costant Parameters: E

„V/f Pattern: E1
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description 485 Page
LCD Diplay Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Input volt-
Sets the Inverter input voltage. 155 to
age setting 200 V 4-6
E1-01 This setting is used as a reference 255 No Q 300H
Input Volt- *1 6-74
age value in protection functions. *1
V/F pattern
selection
0 to D: Select from the 14 preset
patterns.
0 to D,
E1-03 F: Custom user-set patterns F No Q 302H 6-74
V/F F
Selection (Applicable for settings
E1-04 to E1-10.)
Max. output
frequency 0.0 to 50.0
E1-04 No Q 303H 6-74
Max 120.0 Hz
Frequency
Max. volt-
age Output voltage (V) 0.0 to 200.0
E1-05 Max. volt- 255.0 V No Q 304H 6-74
age *1 *1

Base fre-
quency
0.0 to 50.0
E1-06 Base fre- No Q 305H 6-74
quency 120.0 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Mid. output
frequency 0.0 to
E1-07 To set V/f characteristics in a 2.5 Hz No A 306H 6-74
Mid. Fre- 120.0
quency A straight line, set the same values
Mid. output for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case,
frequency
voltage the setting for E1-08 will be disre- 0.0 to 15.0 V
E1-08 garded. No A 307H 6-74
Mid. Volt- 255 *1 *1
age A Always ensure that the four fre-
quencies are set in the following
Min. output
frequency manner: 0.0 to
E1-09 E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > 1.2 Hz No Q 308H 6-74
Min Fre- 120.0
quency E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Min. output
frequency 0.0 to
voltage 9.0 V 4-13
E1-10 255.0 No A 309H
Min *1 6-74
*1
Voltage
Mid. output
frequency 2 0.0 to 0.0 Hz
E1-11 No A 30AH 6-74
Mid Fre- 120.0 *2
quency B
Mid. output
frequency Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the 0.0 to
voltage 2 0.0 V
E1-12 output range. Normally, this setting 255.0 No A 30BH 6-74
Mid Voltage *2
is not required. *1
B
Base volt-
0.0 to
age 0.0 V
E1-13 255.0 No A 30CH 6-74
Base volt- *3
age *1

* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.

5-18
 Parameter Tables

„Motor Setup: E2
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Motor rated Sets the motor rated current.
current These set values will become the
reference values for motor pro- 0.32 to
1.90 A 6-33
E2-01 tection, torque limits and torque 6.40 No Q 30EH
Motor Rated *1 6-73
control. *2
FLA
This parameter is an input data
for autotuning.
Motor line-to- Sets the motor phase-to-phase
line resistance 0.000 9.842
resistance in Ω units.
E2-05 to Ω No A 312H 6-73
Term This parameter is automatically
Resistance 65.000 *1
set during autotuning.
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

‹ Option Parameters: F

„Communications Option Cards: F6

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
DeviceNet Set the stopping method for com-
fault opera-
tion selection munications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop/fault detection
F6-01 0 to 3 1 No A 3A2H -
2: Decelerates to stop using C1-
Comm Bus Flt
Sel 09 deceleration time/fault
detection
3: Continuous operating/alarm
detection
Communica-
tions external 0: Fault detection during power
fault input
detection ON
F6-02 0 or 1 0 No A 3A3H -
method selec- 1: Fault detected during running
tion only
EF0 Detection
Communica-
tions external
0: Deceleration to a stop using
fault input C1-02 deceleration time/fault
operation detection
selection
1: Coast to stop/fault detection
F6-03 2: Decelerates to a stop using 0 to 3 1 No A 3A4H -
C1-09 deceleration time/fault
EF0 Fault
Action detection
3: Continuous operating/alarm
detection
Display
unit selection
for Sets the unit of current monitor
F6-05 Current moni- 0: Ampere 0 or 1 0 No A 3A6H -
tor
1: 100%/8192
Current Unit
Sel

5-19
 ‹ Terminal Function Parameters: H
The following settings are made with the terminal function parameters (H parameters): Settings for external
terminal functions.

„Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Terminal S3
function selec-
H1-01 tion Multi-function contact input 1 0 to 77 24 No A 400H -
Terminal S3
Sel
Terminal S4
function selec-
H1-02 tion Multi-function contact input 2 0 to 77 14 No A 401H -
Terminal S4
Sel
Terminal S5
function selec-
H1-03 tion Multi-function contact input 3 0 to 77 3 (0)* No A 402H -
Terminal S5
Sel
Terminal S6
function selec-
H1-04 tion Multi-function contact input 4 0 to 77 4 (3)* No A 403H -
Terminal S6
Sel
Terminal S7
function selec-
H1-05 tion Multi-function contact input 5 0 to 77 6 (4)* No A 404H -
Terminal S7
Sel
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.

Multi-function Digital Input Functions

Set-
ting Function Page
Value
0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command) 6-9
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: parameter setting) 6-46
2 Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card) 6-48
Multi-step speed reference 1
3 6-6
When H3-05 is set to 0, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 6-6
6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) 6-6
7 Accel/decel time 1 -
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) 6-46
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) 6-46
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used) -
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) 6-48
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) 7-2
19 PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled) 6-67
Parameters write enable (ON: All parameters can be written-in. OFF: All parameters other than
1B 6-86
frequency monitor are write protected.)

5-20
 Parameter Tables

Set-
ting Function Page
Value
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold 6-47
20 to External fault (Desired settings possible)
6-49
2F Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
34 PI soft starter 6-67
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) 6-39
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) 6-39
63 Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02) 6-28
64 External speed search command 3 6-39
67 Communications test mode 6-64
68 High-slip braking (HSB) 6-14
69 Jog Frequency 2 –
6A Drive enable –

„ Multi-function Digital Outputs: H2

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Terminal M1-
M2 function
H2-01 selection Multi-function contact output 1 0 to 38 0 No A 40BH -
Term M1-M2
Sel
Terminal M3-
M4 function
H2-02 selection Multi-function contact output 2 0 to 38 1 No A 40CH -
Term M3-M4
Sel

Multi-function Digital Output Functions

Setting
Function Page
Value

0 During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output) -

1 Zero-speed 6-26
2 Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.) -
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency
3 -
agree)
4 Frequency (F-OUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02 used) -
Frequency (F-OUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01,
5 -
L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready
6 -
READY: After initialization, no faults
7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection -
8 During baseblock (ON: during baseblock) -
9 Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) -
A Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) -
B Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON) 6-31
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05) 6-43

5-21
 Setting
Function Page
Value

Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPF01 has
E -
occurred.)
F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.) -
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed) -
11 Fault reset command active -
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) 6-31
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) 6-43
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) 6-33
38 Drive enabled –

„Analog Inputs: H3
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Gain (termi-
Sets the frequency when 10 V is
nal A1) 0.0 to
H3-02 input, as a percentage of the max- 100.0% Yes A 411H 6-22
Terminal A1 1000
Gain imum output frequency.
Bias (terminal
A1)
Sets the frequency when 0 V is -100.0
H3-03 Terminal A1
input, as a percentage of the max- to 0.0% Yes A 412H 6-22
Bias imum frequency. +100.0
Multi-function
analog input
0: Limit negative frequency set-
terminal A2 tings for gain and bias settings
signal level to 0.
selection
H3-08 2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input). 0 or 2 2 No A 417H 6-22
Switch current and voltage input
Term A2 Sig-
nal using the switch S1 on the control
panel.
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2 Select multi-function analog
H3-09 function selec- input function for terminal A2. 0 to 1F 0 No A 418H 6-22
tion
Refer to the next table.
Terminal A2
Sel

Gain (termi- Sets the input gain (level) when

nal A2)
terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA). 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A 419H 6-22
Set according to the 100% value 1000
Terminal A2
Gain for the function set for H3-09.

Bias (terminal Sets the input gain (level) when

A2) -100.0
terminal 14 is 0 V (4 mA).
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A 41AH 6-22
Set according to the 100% value
Terminal A2 +100.0
Bias for the function set for H3-09.

Terminal A1/
A2 switching
0: Use terminal A1 analog input
as main speed frequency refe-
rence.
H3-13 T A1/A2
1: Use terminal A2 analog input 0 or 1 0 No A 41CH -
Select as main speed frequency refe-
rence.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2.

5-22
 Parameter Tables

H3-09 Settings
Set-
ting Function Contents (100%) Page
Value
0 Frequency bias (Add to terminal A1) Maximum output frequency 6-26
Auxiliary frequency reference (2nd step
2 Maximum output frequency 6-23
analog)
B PI feedback Maximum output frequency 6-67
E Motor temperature input 10 V = 100% 6-36
1F Analog input not used. -

5-23
 „Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description 485 Page
LCD Dispay Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Monitor selec- Sets the number of the monitor
tion (terminal
FM)
item to be output (U1- ††
) from
H4-01 terminal FM. 1 to 38 2 No A 41DH 6-50
Terminal FM 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be
Sel set.

Gain (termi-
Sets the multi-function analog
nal FM) output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item
output will be output in multiples 0 to 4-7
H4-02 100% Yes Q 41EH
of 10 V. 1000 6-50
Terminal FM
Gain The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibra-
tion function is available.
Bias (terminal Sets the multi-function analog
FM) output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a per- -110 to
H4-03 0.0% Yes A 41FH 4-7
Terminal FM centage of 10 V. +110
Bias The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibra-
tion function is available.
Monitor selec- Sets the number of the monitor
tion (terminal
AM)
item to be output (U1- ††
) from
4-7
H4-04 terminal AM. 1 to 38 3 No A 420H
6-50
Terminal AM 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be
Sel set.

Gain (termi-
Set the voltage level gain for
nal AM) multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10
V to be output as the 100% output 0 to 4-7
H4-05 50.0% Yes Q 421H
for the monitor items. The maxi- 1000 6-50
Terminal AM
Gain mum output from the terminal is
10 V. A meter calibration func-
tion is available.
Bias (terminal Sets the multi-function analog
AM) output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
-110.0
down parallel movement as a per-
H4-06 to 0.0% Yes A 422H -
Terminal AM centage of 10 V.
+110.0
Bias The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibra-
tion function is available.
Analog output Sets the signal output level for
1 signal level
selection
multi-function output 1 (terminal
H4-07 FM) 0 or 2 0 No A 423H -
AO Level 0: 0 to +10 V output
Select1 2: 4 – 20 mA*
Analog output Sets the signal output level for
2 signal level
selection
multi-function output 2 (terminal
H4-08 AM) 0 or 2 0 No A 424H -
AO Level 0: 0 to +10 V output
Select2 2: 4 – 20 mA*

* An analog output of 4-20 mA can not be used with the standard terminal board. Therefore an optional terminal board (with shunt connector CN15) is
needed.

5-24
 Parameter Tables

„RS-422A/485 Communications: H5
Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
ter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Station
address 0 to 20
H5-01 Set the Inverter's node address. 1F No A 425H 6-54
Serial Comm *
Adr
Communica- Set the baud rate for 6CN RS-
tion speed
selection 422A/485 communications.
0: 1200 bps
H5-02 1: 2400 bps 0 to 4 3 No A 426H 6-54
Serial Baud 2: 4800 bps
Rate
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communica- Set the parity for 6CN RS-422A/
tion parity
selection 485 communications.
H5-03 0: No parity 0 to 2 0 No A 427H 6-54
Serial Com Sel 1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Stopping Set the stopping method for com-
method after
communica- munications errors.
tion error 0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
H5-04 0 to 3 3 No A 428H 6-54
1: Coast to stop
Serial Fault Sel 2: Emergency stop using decele-
ration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Communica- Set whether or not a communica-
tion error
detection tions timeout is to be detected as a
H5-05 selection communications error. 0 or 1* 1 No A 429H 6-54
0: Do not detect.
Serial Flt Dtct
1: Detect
Send wait time Set the time from the Inverter
H5-06 Transmit Wait- receiving data to when the 5 to 65 5 ms No A 42AH 6-54
TIM Inverter starts to send.
RTS control Select to enable or disable RTS
ON/OFF
control.
H5-07 0: Disabled (RTS is always ON) 0 or 1 1 No A 42BH 6-54
RTS Control
Sel 1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.

5-25
 ‹ Protection Function Parameters: L
The following settings are made with the protection function parameters (L parameters): Motor selection func-
tion, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits and hard-
ware protection.

„Motor Overload: L1
Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
ter Description 485 Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
Motor protec- electric thermal overload relay.
tion selection
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protec-
4-7
L1-01 tion 0 or 1 1 No Q 480H
6-33
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned
MOL Fault Sel off, the thermal value is reset, so
even if this parameter is set to 1,
protection may not be effective.
Motor protec- Sets the electric thermal detection
tion time
parameter
time in seconds units.
Usually changing this setting is
not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% over- 0.1 to
L1-02 1.0 min No A 481H 6-33
load for one minute. 5.0
MOL Time
Const When the motor's overload resis-
tance is known, also set the over-
load resistance protection time for
when the motor is hot started.
Alarm opera- Set H3-09 to E and select the
tion selection
during motor operation when the input motor
overheating temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection level
(1.17 V).
L1-03 0: Decelerate to stop 0 to 3 3 No A 482H 6-35
Mtr OH Alarm 1: Coast to stop
Sel 2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (OH3 on
the Operator flashes).
Motor over- Set H3-09 to E and select the
heating opera-
tion selection
operation when the motor temper-
ature (thermistor) input exceeds
the operation detection level (2.34
L1-04 V). 0 to 2 1 No A 483H 6-35
Mtr OH Fault 0: Decelerate to stop
Sel 1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
Motor temper-
ature input fil- Set H3-09 to E and set the primary
ter time
parameter delay time parameter for motor 0.00 to
L1-05 0.20 s No A 484H 6-35
temperature (thermistor) inputs in 10.00
Mtr Temp Filter seconds.

5-26
 Parameter Tables

„Power Loss Ridethrough: L2

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description 485 Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Momentary 0: Disabled (main circuit under-
power loss
detection voltage (UV) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the
power returns within the time
for L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, main circuit under-
L2-01 0 to 2 0 No A 485H 6-37
PwrL Selec-
voltage detection.)
tion 2: Enabled while CPU is opera-
ting. (Restarts when power
returns during control operati-
ons. Does not detect main cir-
cuit undervoltage.)
Momentary
power loss Ridethrough time, when Momen-
ridethru time
0 to 0.1 s
L2-02 tary Power Loss Selection (L2- No A 486H 6-37
PwrL Ride- 25.5 *1
01) is set to 1, in units of seconds.
thru t
Sets the Inverter's minimum base-
Min. base-
block time block time, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ride-
through.
Sets the time to approximately
0.1 to 0.1 s 6-37
L2-03 0.7 times the motor secondary No A 487H
5.0 *1 6-38
PwrL Base- circuit time parameter.
block t When an overcurrent or overvolt-
age occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
Voltage recov- Sets the time required to return
ery time the Inverter output voltage to nor-
mal voltage at the completion of a
0.0 to 0.3 s 6-37
L2-04 speed search. No A 488H
PwrL V/F 5.0 *1 6-38
Sets the time required to recover
Ramp t
from 0 V to the maximum volt-
age.

Undervoltage Sets the main circuit undervolt-

detection level age (UV) detection level (main
circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is 150 to
190 V
L2-05 not necessary. 210 No A 489H 6-37
*2
PUV Det Insert an AC reactor in the *2
Level Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit undervoltage detec-
tion level.
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.

5-27
 „Stall Prevention: L3
Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
ter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Stall preven- 0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
tion selection
during accel With a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stop-
ped when L3-02 level is excee-
ded. Acceleration starts again
L3-01 0 to 2 1 No A 48FH 6-19
when the current is returned.)
StallP Accel
Sel 2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is automati-
cally adjusted. Set accelera-
tion time is disregarded.)
Stall preven- Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
tion level dur-
ing accel
2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter
rated current.
L3-02 0 to 200 120% No A 490H 6-19
Usually changing this setting is
StallP Accel
Lvl not necessary. The factory setting
reduces the set values when the
motor stalls.
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set.
Stall preven- If deceleration time is too
tion selection
during decel short, a DC-Bus overvoltage
may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stop-
ped when the DC-Bus voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
4-7
L3-04 2: Intelligent deceleration mode 0 to 2 1 No Q 492H
6-21
(Deceleration rate is automati-
StallP Decel cally adjusted so that in Inver-
Sel
ter can decelerate in the
shortest possible time. Set
deceleration time is disregar-
ded.)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor Unit and Braking Unit) is
used, always set to 0.
Stall preven- 0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a
tion selection
during running heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the dece-
L3-05 leration time for the stall pre- 0 to 2 1 No A 493H 6-30
StallP Run Sel vention function is C1-02.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the dece-
leration time for the stall pre-
vention function is C1-04.)
Stall preven- Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
tion level dur-
ing running Set as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current.
30 to
L3-06 Usually changing this setting is 120% No A 494H 6-30
200
StallP Run not necessary.
Level
The factory setting reduces the set
values when the motor stalls.

5-28
 Parameter Tables

„Reference Detection: L4
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Speed agree-
ment detec-
Effective when "Desired fre-
tion level quency (ref/setting) agree 1",
0.0 to
L4-01 "Frequency detection 1" or "Fre- 0.0 Hz No A 499H -
Spd Agree 120.0
quency detection 2" is set for a
Level
multi-function output.
Speed agree-
ment detec-
Effective when "Frequency
tion width (speed) agree 1", "Desired fre-
0.0 to
L4-02 quency (speed) agree 1" or "Fre- 2.0 Hz No A 49AH -
Spd Agree 20.0
quency (F-OUT) detection 1" is
Width
set for a multi-function output.
Operation
when fre-
0: Stop (Operation follows the
quency refer- frequency reference.)
ence is 1: Operation continues at the fre-
missing
quency, set in parameter L4-
L4-05 0 or 1 0 No A 49DH 6-43
06.
Ref Loss Sel
Frequency reference loss means
that the frequency reference
value drops over 90% in 400 ms.
Frequency
reference
value at fre- Sets the frequency reference
quency refer- 0.0 to
L4-06 ence loss value when the frequency refer- 80% No A 4C2H -
100.0
ence is missing
Fref at Floss

„Fault Restart: L5
Name Change
Param- Rs-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description 485 Page
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Register
tion
Number of
auto restart
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts attempts.
L5-01 Automatically restarts after a 0 to 10 0 No A 49EH 6-44
Num of fault and conducts a speed search
Restarts
from the run frequency.
Auto restart
operation
Sets whether a fault contact out-
selection put is activated during fault
restart.
L5-02 0: No output (Fault contact is not 0 or 1 0 No A 49FH 6-44
Restart Sel activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is acti-
vated.)

5-29
 „Torque Detection: L6
Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
ter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

0: Overtorque/undertorque detec-
Torque detec- tion disabled.
tion selection 1
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement; opera-
tion continues after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected conti-
nuously during operation; ope-
ration continues after
overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement; output
stopped upon detection (pro-
tected operation).
4: Overtorque detected conti-
nuously during operation; out-
put stopped upon detection
L6-01 0 to 8 0 No A 4A1H 6-31
(protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only
Torq Det 1 Sel
with speed agreement; opera-
tion continues after overtorque
(warning).
6: Undertorque detected conti-
nuously during operation; ope-
ration continues after
overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement; output
stopped upon detection (pro-
tected operation).
8: Undertorque detected conti-
nuously during operation; out-
put stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
Torque detec-
tion level 1 Inverter rated current is set as
L6-02 0 to 300 150% No A 4A2H 6-31
Torq Det 1 Lvl 100%.

Torque detec-
tion time 1 Sets the overtorque/undertorque 0.0 to
L6-03 Torq Det 1
0.1 s No A 4A3H 6-31
detection time. 10.0
Time

„Hardware Protection: L8
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Overheat pre-
alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for
the Inverter overheat detection
pre-alarm in °C. 50 to
L8-02 95 °C* No A 4AEH 6-45
OH Pre-alarm The pre-alarm detects when the 130
Lvl
cooling fin temperature reaches
the set value.

5-30
 Parameter Tables

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Operation Sets the operation for when the

selection after Inverter overheat pre-alarm
overheat pre-
alarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop in decelera-
tion time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
L8-03 2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1- 0 to 3 3 No A 4AFH 6-45
09.
OH Pre alarm
Sel
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0
to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
Ground pro-
tection selec-
tion 0:Disabled
L8-09 0 or 1 1 No A 4B5H -
Ground Fault 1:Enabled
Sel
Cooling fan
control delay
Set the time in seconds to delay
time turning OFF the cooling fan after 0 to
L8-11 60 s No A 4B7H -
Fan Delay the cooling fan OFF command is 300
Time received.
Ambient tem-
45 to
L8-12 perature Set the ambient temperature. 45 °C* No A 4B8H -
Ambient Temp 60
OL2 charac-
teristics selec- 0: OL2 characteristics at low
tion at low speeds disabled.
L8-15 speeds 0 or 1 1 No A 4BBH -
1: OL2 characteristics at low
OL2 Sel @ L-
Spd
speeds enabled.
Soft CLA
selection 0: Disabled (gain = 0)
L8-18 0 or 1 1 No A 4BFH -
Soft CLA Sel 1: Enabled

* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

5-31
 ‹ n: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments parameters ( n-parameters): Hunting prevention
and speed feedback detection control.

„Hunting Prevention Function: n1

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Hunting-pre- 0: Hunting-prevention function

vention func- disabled
tion selection 1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
The hunting-prevention function
suppresses hunting when the
n1-01 0 or 1 1 No A 580H 6-29
motor is operating with a light
Hunt Prev load.
Select
If high response has the priority
over vibration suppression, dis-
able the hunting-prevention func-
tion.
Set the hunting-prevention gain
Hunting-pre- multiplication factor.
vention gain Normally, there is no need to
change this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light 0.00 to 4-13
n1-02 1.00 No A 581H
load, increase the setting. 2.50 6-29
Hunt Prev
• If the motor stalls, reduce the
Gain setting.
If the setting is to large, the volt-
age will be to suppressed and the
motor may stall.

„High-slip Braking: n3
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
High-slip brak-
ing decelera- Sets the frequency width for
tion frequency deceleration during high-slip
n3-01 width braking in percent, taking the 1 to 20 5% No A 588H -
HSB Decel Maximum Frequency (E1-04) as
Width 100%.
High-slip brak-
ing current Sets the current limit for decelera-
limit tion during high-slip braking in
percent, taking the motor rated 100 to
n3-02 150% No A 589H -
HSB Current current as 100%. The resulting 200
Ref limit must be 150% of the Inverter
rated current or less.

5-32
 Parameter Tables

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

High-slip brak-
ing stop dwell Sets the dwell time for the output
time frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz) dur-
0.0 to
n3-03 ing V/f control. 1.0 s No A 58AH -
10.0
HSB Dwel-
Effective only during deceleration
Tim@Stp for high-slip braking.

High-slip brak-
ing OL time Set the OL time when the output
frequency does not change for 30 to
n3-04 40 s No A 58BH -
some reason during deceleration 1200
HSB Ol Time for high-slip braking.

‹ Digital Operator Parameters: o

„Monitor Select: o1
Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
ter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Monitor selec- Set the number of the 3rd. monitor
tion item to be displayed in the Drive
o1-01
User Monitor Mode. (U1- †† )
4 to 33 6 Yes A 500H -
Sel (Only LCD operator.)
Monitor selec- Sets the monitor item to be dis-
tion after
power up played when the power is turned
on.
o1-02 1: Frequency reference 1 to 4 1 Yes A 501H 6-80
Power ON 2: Output frequency
Monitor
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01

5-33
 Name Change
Parame- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
ter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency refer-
Frequency ence and frequency monitor.
units of refer-
ence setting 0: 0.01 Hz units
and monitor 1: 0.01% units (Maximum out-
put frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
r/min units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting 0 to
o1-03 0 No A 502H 6-80
and display for the max. output 39999
frequency.
Display Scal-
ing Set digit number
excluding the decimal
point.

Set the number of

digits below the
decimal point to
display.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
LCD-Bright- 1: light
ness 2:
o1-05 3: normal 0 to 5 3 Yes A 509H
LCD Contrast 4:
5: dark

5-34
 Parameter Tables

„Multi-function Selections: o2
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
LOCAL/
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
REMOTE key
enable/dis- Remote Key
able 0: Disabled
o2-01 0 or 1 1 No A 505H 6-80
1: Enabled (Switches between
Local/Remote
Key
the Digital Operator and the
parameter settings.)
STOP key Sets the Stop Key in the run
during control
circuit terminal mode.
operation 0: Disabled (When the run com-
mand is issued from and exter-
o2-02 0 or 1 1 No A 506H 6-80
nal terminal, the Stop Key is
Oper STOP
Key
disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
Clears or stores user initial val-
ues.
Parameter ini-
tial value 0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the
set parameters as user initial
o2-03 values.) 0 to 2 0 No A 507H 6-80
2: All clear (Clears all recorded
user initial values)
User Defaults
When the set parameters are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
kVA selection
Do not set unless using a control
o2-04
Inverter Model
board from an Inverter with a dif- 0 to FF 0* No A 508H -
ferent capacity.

Frequency When the frequency reference is

reference set- set on the Digital Operator fre-
ting method
selection
quency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter Key is neces-
sary.
o2-05 0 or 1 0 No A 509H 6-80
0: Enter Key needed
Operator 1: Enter Key not needed
M.O.P. When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
Operation Sets the operation when the Digi-
selection
when digital tal Operator is disconnected.
operator is 0: Disabled (Operation continues
disconnected
even if the Digital Operator is
o2-06 disconnected.) 0 or 1 0 No A 50AH -
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at
Oper Detec-
tion Digital Operator disconnec-
tion. Inverter output is cut off
and fault contact is operated.)
Cumulative Sets the cumulative operation
operation time
setting time in hour units. 0 to
o2-07 0 hr No A 50BH 6-80
Elapsed Time Operation time is calculated from 65535
Set the set values.

5-35
 Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Cumulative 0: Cumulative time when the
operation time
selection Inverter power is on. (All time
while the Inverter power is on
o2-08 is accumulated.) 0 or 1 0 No A 50CH -
Elapsed Time 1: Cumulative Inverter run time.
Run
(Only Inverter output time is
accumulated.)
Initialize Mode
2: European specification
o2-09 2 or 5 2 No A 50DH –
Init Mode Sel
5: PV-E specification

Fan operation Set the initial value of the fan

time setting
operation time. 0 to
o2-10 0 hr No A 50EH 6-80
Fan ON Time The operation time accumulates 65535
Set
from the set value.
Fault trace ini- 0: Disable
tialize
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after
o2-12 0 or 1 0 No A 511H -
FLT Trace Init setting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned
to ”0“
* This setting depends on the inverter capacity.

„ Copy Function: o3
Parameters for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
Copy function
selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
o3-01 Copy Function
0 to 3 0 No A 515H 6-82
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
Sel
3: Verify (compare)
Read permis-
sion selection 0: Read prohibited
o3-02 Read Allow-
0 or 1 0 No A 516H 6-82
1: Read permitted
able

‹ T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning parameters (T parameters): Settings for autotuning.
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Motor output
power
Set the output power of the motor 0.00 to 0.40
T1-02 No A 702H 4-8
Mtr Rated
in kilowatts. 650.00 kW
Power

5-36
 Parameter Tables

Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485 Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Motor rated
current
Set the rated current of the motor 0.32 to
T1-04 1.90 A No A 704H 4-8
in Amps. 6.40
Rated Current

‹ U: Monitor Parameters
The following settings are made with the monitor parameters (U parameters): Setting parameters for monitor-
ing in drive mode.

„ Status Monitor Parameters: U1

Param- Name RS-422A/
Output Signal Level During Multi- Min. Access
eter- LCD Description 485
Function Analog Output Unit Level
Number Display Register
Frequency
reference Monitors/sets the frequency ref- 10 V: Max. frequency 0.00
U1-01 Frequency
A 40H
erence value.* (0 to + 10 V possible) Hz
Ref
Output fre-
quency 10 V: Max. frequency 0.00
U1-02 Monitors the output frequency.* A 41H
Output Freq (0 to + 10 V possible) Hz

Output current
10 V: Inverter rated output
current 0.0
U1-03 Monitors the output current. A 42H
Output Cur-
(0 to +10 V, absolute value A
rent output)

Output volt-
age Monitors the output voltage refer- 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.0
U1-06 Output Volt-
A 45H
ence value in the Inverter. (0 to +10 V output) V
age
DC bus volt-
age Monitors the main DC voltage in 10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
U1-07 DC Bus Volt-
0V A 46H
the Inverter.
age
Output power
10V: Inverter maximum
Monitors the output power (inter- capacity (max. appli- 0.0
U1-08 Output kWatts nal detected value) cable motor capacity) kW
(0 to +10 V possible)
Input terminal
status
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON

U1-10 1: Multi input 2 (Cannot be output.) - A 49H

Input Term Sts (S4) is ON
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON

5-37
 Param- Name RS-422A/
Output Signal Level During Multi- Min. Access
eter- LCD Description 485
Function Analog Output Unit Level
Number Display Register

Shows output ON/OFF status.

1: Multi-function
Output termi- contact output 1
nal status (M1-M2) is ON

1: Multi-function
contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
U1-11 (Cannot be output.) - A 4AH
Not used
(Always 0)

Output Term Not used

(Always 0).
Sts
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is
ON

Inverter operating status.

Operation sta- Run
tus
1: Zero speed
1: everse
1: Reset signal
input
U1-12 (Cannot be output.) - A 4BH
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready

Int Ctl Sts 1 1: Minor fault

1: Major fault

Cumulative
operation time Monitors the total operating time
of the Inverter.
0
U1-13 The initial value and the operat- (Cannot be output.) A 4CH
Elapsed Time hr
ing time/power ON time selection
can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
Software No.
(flash mem-
U1-14 ory) (Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.) - A 4DH
FLASH ID
Terminal A1
input voltage Monitors the input voltage of the
voltage frequency reference. An 10 V: 100% (10 V)
U1-15 0.0% A 4EH
Term A1 Level input of 10 V corresponds to (0 to + 10 V possible)
100%.
Terminal A2
input voltage Monitors the input voltage of the
multi-function analog input. 10 V: 100% (10 V)
U1-16 Term A2 Level
0.0% A 4FH
An input of 10 V corresponds to (0 to +10 V possible)
100%.
Motor second-
ary current Monitors the calculated value of
10 V:Motor rated secon-
(Iq) the motor secondary current.
U1-18 dary current) 0.0% A 51H
Mot Sec Cur- The motor rated secondary cur-
(0 to +10 V output)
rent rent corresponds to 100%.
Output fre-
quency after Monitors the output frequency
soft-starter after the soft starter.
(SFS output) 10 V: Max. frequency 0.00
U1-20 The frequency given does not A 53H
(0 to + 10 V possible) Hz
include compensations.
SFS Output
The unit is set in o1-03.

5-38
 Parameter Tables

Param- Name RS-422A/

Output Signal Level During Multi- Min. Access
eter- LCD Description 485
Function Analog Output Unit Level
Number Display Register
PI feedback Monitors the feedback value
value
when PI control is used. 10 V: Max. frequency 0.00
U1-24 A 57H
PI Feedback
The input for the max. frequency (0 to + 10 V possible) %
corresponds to 100%.
Software No.
(CPU) (Manufacturer’s CPU software
U1-28 (Cannot be output.) - A 5BH
CPU ID No.)
OPE fault
parameter Shows the first parameter number
U1-34 (Cannot be output.) - A 61H
OPE Detected where an OPE fault was detected.
PI input vol-
ume
PI feedback volume
10 V: Max. frequency 0.00
U1-36 Given as maximum frequency/ A 63H
PI Input (0 to + 10 V possible) %
100%
PI output vol-
ume
PI control output
10 V: Max. frequency 0.00
U1-37 Given as maximum frequency/ A 64H
PI Output (0 to + 10 V possible) %
100%
PI command PI command + PI command bias
0.00
U1-38 Given as maximum frequency/ 10 V: Max. frequency A 65H
PI Setpoint %
100%
Shows RS-422A/485 errors.
RS-422A/485
communica- 1: CRC error
tions error 1: Data length error
code Not used
(always 0)
1: Parity error

U1-39 (Cannot be output.) - A 66H

1: Overrun error

1: Framing error
Transmit Err
1: Timeout
Not used
(always 0)

Cooling fan
operating time
Monitors the total operating time
0
U1-40 FAN Elapsed
of the cooling fan. The time can (Cannot be output.) A 68H
hr
Time be set in 02-10.
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).

5-39
 „ Fault Trace: U2
Param- Name Output Signal Level RS-422A/
Min. Access
eter- Description During Multi-Function Analog 485
LCD Diplay Unit Level
Number Output Register

Current fault

U2-01 The content of the current fault. - A 80H

Current Fault

Previous fault
The content of the error that
U2-02 occurred just prior to the current - A 81H
Last Fault fault.

Reference fre-
quency at
fault The reference frequency when 0.00
U2-03 A 82H
Frequency
the previous fault occurred. Hz
Ref

Output fre-
quency at
fault The output frequency when the 0.00
U2-04 A 83H
previous fault occurred. Hz
Output Freq

Output cur-
rent at fault
The output current when the pre- 0.0
U2-05 (Cannot be output.) A 84H
Output Cur-
vious fault occurred. A
rent

Output volt-
age reference
at fault The output reference voltage 0.0
U2-07 A 86H
Output Volt-
when the previous fault occurred. V
age

DC bus volt-
age at fault
The main current DC voltage
U2-08 0V A 87H
DC Bus Volt-
when the previous fault occurred.
age

Output power
at fault
The output power when the previ- 0.0
U2-09 A 88H
ous fault occurred. kW
Output kWatts

Input terminal
status at fault
The input terminal status when
the previous fault occurred.
U2-11 - A 8AH
The format is the same as for U1-
Input Term Sts 10.

5-40
 Parameter Tables

Param- Name Output Signal Level RS-422A/

Min. Access
eter- Description During Multi-Function Analog 485
LCD Diplay Unit Level
Number Output Register
Output termi-
nal status at
fault The output terminal status when
U2-12 the previous fault occurred. The - A 8BH
Output Term format is the same as for U1-11.
Sts

Operation sta-
tus at fault The operating status when the
U2-13 previous fault occurred. The for- (Cannot be output.) - A 8CH
Inverter Sta- mat is the same as for U1-12.
tus

Cumulative
operation time
at fault The operating time when the pre- 0
U2-14 A 8DH
vious fault occurred. hr
Elapsed Time

Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1 and UV2.

5-41
 „Fault History: U3
Param- Name Output Signal Level RS-422A/
Min. Access
eter- Description During Multi-Function Analog 485
LCD Display Unit Level
Number Output Register

Last fault
U3-01 The error content of 1st last fault. - A 90H
Last Fault

Second last
fault The error content of 2nd last
U3-02 - A 91H
Fault Mes- fault.
sage 2

Third last fault

U3-03 The error content of 3rd last fault. - A 92H
Fault Mes-
sage 3
Fourth last
fault
U3-04 The error content of 4th last fault. - A 93H
Fault Mes-
sage 4
Cumulative
operation time
at fault The total operating time when the 0
U3-05 A 94H
Elapsed Time 1st last fault occurred. hr
1
Accumulated
time of sec-
ond fault The total operating time when the 0
U3-06 A 95H
Elapsed Time 2nd last fault occurred. hr
2 (Cannot be output.)
Accumulated
time of third
fault The total operating time when the 0
U3-07 A 96H
Elapsed Time 3rd last fault occurred. hr
3
Accumulated
time of fourth/
oldest fault The total operating time when the 0
U3-08 A 97H
Elapsed Time 4th last fault occurred. hr
4
Fifth last to
10th last faultt
804H
805H
U3-09
The error content of the 5th to 806H
- – A
Fault Mes- 10th fault 807H
U3-14 sage ..
808H
809H
Accumulated
time of fifth to
80EH
tenth fault 80FH
U3-15
Total generating time when 5th ... 810H
– 0hr A
Elapsed Time 10th pevious fault occured 811H
U3-20
.. 812H
813H
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1 and UV2.

5-42
 Parameter Tables

„200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW

Para
meter
Num-
Unit Factory Setting
ber
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*
E1-08
V 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 19.0 24.0 19.0 24.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
E1-10
V 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 11.0 15.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
*

* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.

„200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW

Para
meter
Num-
Unit Factory Setting
ber
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*
E1-08
V 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 18.0 23.0 18.0 23.0 14.0 14.0 14.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
E1-10
V 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
*

* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.

„200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW

Para
meter
Num-
Unit Factory Setting
ber
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*
E1-08
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
E1-10
V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
*

* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.

5-43
 ‹ Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

„200 V Class Inverters

Param-
eter- Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 288.20 223.70 169.40 156.80 122.90 94.75 72.69 70.44 63.13
cient
Torque compensation
C4-02 ms 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
primary delay time
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
tion
E2-01 Motor rated current A 1.90 3.30 6.20 8.50 14.00 19.60 26.60 39.7 53.0
Motor line-to-line resis-
E2-05 Ω 9.842 5.156 1.997 1.601 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.230 0.138
tance
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95

5-44
 Parameter Tables

Param-
eter Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
o2-04 kVA selection - 9 A B C D E F 10 11
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 57.87 51.79 46.27 38.16 35.78 31.35 23.10 23.10 23.10
cient
Torque compensation
C4-02 ms 200 200 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
primary delay time
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 4 3 3 3 3 3 1
tion*
E2-01 Motor rated current A 65.8 77.2 105.0 131.0 160.0 190.0 260.0 260.0 260.0

Motor line-to-line resis-

E2-05 Ω 0.101 0.079 0.064 0.039 0.030 0.022 0.023 0.023 0.023
tance
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1 or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10
kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.

5-45
 „400 V Class Inverters
Param-
eter- Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
cient
Torque compensation
C4-02 ms 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
primary delay time
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
tion *
E2-01 Motor rated current A 1.00 1.60 3.10 4.20 7.00 7.00 9.80 13.30 19.9 26.5
Motor line-to-line resis-
E2-05 Ω 38.198 22.459 10.100 6.495 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.550
tance
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95

Param-
eter- Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
o2-04 kVA selection - 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 115.74 103.58 92.54 76.32 71.56 67.20 46.20 41.22 36.23 33.18
cient
Torque compensation
C4-02 ms 200 200 200 200 200 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
primary delay time
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 2
tion *
E2-01 Motor rated current A 32.9 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7 95.0 130.0 156.0 190.0 223.0
Motor line-to-line resis-
E2-05 Ω 0.403 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122 0.088 0.092 0.056 0.046 0.035
tance
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.7
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 100 95 110 110 110

5-46
 Parameter Tables

Fac-
Param-
tory
eter- Name Unit
Set-
Number
ting
- Inverter Capacity kW 160
o2-04 kVA selection - 34
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 30.13
cient
Torque compensation
C4-02 ms 1000
primary delay time
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 2
tion *
E2-01 Motor rated current A 270.0

Motor line-to-line resis-

E2-05 Ω 0.029
tance
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.8
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 100
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1 or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4:
10 kHz, , 5: 12.5 kHz and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.

5-47
 6
Chapter 6
Parameter Settings by
function
Application and Overload Selections ....................................6-2
Frequency Reference.............................................................6-4
Run Command.......................................................................6-8
Stopping Methods................................................................6-10
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics....................6-17
Adjusting Frequency References.........................................6-22
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..........6-26
Improved Operating Efficiency...........................................6-27
Machine Protection..............................................................6-30
Continuing Operation ..........................................................6-37
Inverter Protection...............................................................6-45
Input Terminal Functions ....................................................6-46
Monitor Parameters .............................................................6-50
Individual Functions............................................................6-52
Digital Operator Functions..................................................6-80
 Application and Overload Selections

‹ Select the Overload to Suit the Application

Depending on the application, the carrier frequency can be changed. Pay attention to the following explana-
tions when changing the settings.

„Related Parameters
Param- Name Changes
Setting Factory During Access
eter LCD Details
Range Setting Opera- Level
No. Display tion?

Carrier frequency selec- Select carrier wave fixed pattern.

tion Select F to enable detailed settings using parame-
ters C6-03 to C6-05.
1: Catrrier 2 kHz
2: Carrier 5 kHz 6
C6-02 3: Carrier 8,0 kHz 1 to F *1
No Q
CarrierFreq Sel 4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15 kHz
F: User set*1

Carrier frequency upper Set upper and lower carrier frequency limits in
limit kHz.
Set the carrier wave gain as shown below. 2.0 to 15.0 kHz
C6-03 In vector control method, the carrier frequency is 15.0 No A
*1
*2 *3
CarrierFreq Max fixed according to C6-03 (Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit).
Carrier frequency
Carrier frequency lower
limit
0.4 to
C6-04 Output frequency x 15.0 kHz No A
15.0 *1
(C6-05) x K *2 *3
CarrierFreq Min Output frequency

(Maximum output frequency)

Carrier frequency pro-
portional gain K is the coefficient determined by the set
value in C6-03.
C6-05 C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3 00 to 99 00 No A
*3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz
CarrierFreq Gain
:K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 2
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 2. The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. Can be set and referenced only when C6-02 is set to F.

Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:
• Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency)
1 to 6 (15 kHz) 1 to 4 (10 kHz) 1 to 2 (5 kHz)
setting

If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• The carrier frequency can be varied to match the output frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by
setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit) and C6-05 (Car-
rier Frequency Proportional Gain).

6-2
 Application and Overload Selections

Carrier

06-03

Output frequency x 06-05

06-04 x K*

Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency

Fig 6.1

*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.

C6-03 Š 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 Š 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz < C6-03: K=1

• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value or set C6-05 to 0.
• If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) < 6 and C6-03 < C6-04, OPE11 (Data setting error) will
occur.

„Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level

When using a 200 V Class Inverter 30 to 110 kW or a 400 V Class Inverter for 30 to 160 kW with a carrier fre-
quency higher than 10 kHz, the Inverter overload level will be reduced. Even when the overload current is
below 120%, in this case an OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction
level is shown below.

Overload Current Reduction Level

100%

50%

0 5 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz

Fig 6.2 Overload Current Reduction Level

6-3
 Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.

‹ Selecting the Frequency Reference Source

Set parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Set the frequency reference source

Reference selection
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
b1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q
input)
Reference Source 2: RS-422A/485 communications
3: Option Card

„Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator

When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.

Fig 6.3 Frequency Setting Display

„Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)

When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input)
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).

Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only

If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.

Inverter
2 kΩ

+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
2 kΩ A1 (Master speed frequency
reference)
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)

Fig 6.4 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input

6-4
 Frequency Reference

2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary

If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed fre-
quency reference to control circuit terminal A1 and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 (master speed frequency reference) will
be the Inverter frequency reference and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 (auxiliary speed frequency refer-
ence) will be the Inverter frequency reference.

Inverter
S3 Multi-step speed
Master/ command 1
Auxiliary
SC Sequence common
2 kΩ
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
2 kΩ 0 to 10 V input
A1 (Master speed frequency
0 to 10 V reference)
input
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
reference)
2 kΩ AC (Analog common)

DIP switch S1

Fig 6.5 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input

Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, observe the following precautions.
• Turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 for switching between voltage and current (factory setting is ON).
• The parameter H3-08 has to be set to 0.

„Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current

When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A2. Input the cur-
rent (4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection) is set to 0 (factory setting)
he input on A2 is added to A1.

Fig 6.6 Frequency Reference Using Current

Inverter

+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)

A1 (Auxiliary speed frequency

reference)
4 to 20 mA input
A2 (Master speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)

DIP switch S1

6-5
 „Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
• The parameter H3-08 has to be set to 2 (4 - 20 mA input).
• If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency
reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.

‹ Using Multi-Step Speed Operation

With SYSDRIVE PV series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 5 steps, using 4 frequency
references and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.

„Related Parameters
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi-
function contact inputs.

Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Parameter
Terminal Set Value Details
Number
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
S5 H1-03 4
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)

S6 H1-04 5 Multi-step speed command 2

S7 H1-05 6 Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)

Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs

You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function
contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed commands 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The follow-
ing table shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS5 TerminalS6 TerminalS7
Speed Multi-step Multi-step Jog Fre- Selected Frequency
Speed Com- Speed Com- quency Selec-
mand 2 mand 3 tion
1 OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency

2 ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency

3 OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 3 d1-03

4 ON ON OFF Frequency reference 4 d1-04

5 - - * Jog frequency d1-17

ON

* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.

Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1 and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Ref-
erence 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).

6-6
 Frequency Reference

„Connection Example and Time Chart

The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 5-step
operation.

Inverter

Forward/stop

Reverse/stop

Error reset

Fault Reset

Multi-step reference 1

Multi-step reference 2

Jog frequency

SC Sequence common

Fig 6.7 Control Circuit Terminal During 5-step Operation

Frequency
reference 4
Frequency Frequency
reference reference 3
Frequency reference
2: Auxiliary speed fre-
quency
Jog frequency
Frequency reference 1:
Master speed frequency

Forward/stop

Multi-step speed
command 1

Multi-step speed
command 2
Jog frequency
selection

Fig 6.8 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart

6-7
 Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.

‹ Selecting the Run Command Source

Set parameter b1-02 to select the source for the run command.

„Related Parameters
Change
Param- Name Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
LCD Display tion

Operation method selec-

tion Set the run command source.
0: Digital operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
b1-02 0 to 3 1 No Q
Run Source input)
2: RS-422A/485 communications
3: Option Card

„Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator

When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.

„Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals

When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.

Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence

The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward opera-
tion will be performed and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control cir-
cuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will
stop.

Inverter
Forward/Stop

Reverse/Stop

Sequence common

Fig 6.9 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example

6-8
 Run Command

Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence

When any parameter from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, termi-
nals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions
as a forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the
input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.

Stop switch Operation switch

(NC contact) (NO contact)
Run command (operates when ON)

Stop command (stopped when ON)

Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)

Sequence input common

Fig 6.10 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example

50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
Run command OFF
(stopped)
Stop command
OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
Forward/reverse
command

Motor speed

Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward

Fig 6.11 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart

Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run
command self-holding in the Inverter.

INFO

6-9
 Stopping Methods

‹ Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input

There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer

Set parameter b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
number
tion

Stopping method selec- Select stopping method when stop com-

tion mand is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
b1-03 0 to 3 0 No Q
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast
Stopping Method
to stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands
are ignored during deceleration time.)
Zero speed level (DC
injection braking start-
Set the frequency to start the DC injection
ing frequency) braking in units of Hz when deceleration to
0.0 to
b2-01 stop is selected. 10.0
0.5 Hz No A
DCInj Start Freq DC injection braking starts from E1-09
when b2-01 < E1-09.
DC injection braking cur-
rent
Set the DC injection braking current as a
0 to
b2-02 percentage, taking the Inverter rated current 100
50% No A
DCInj Current as 100%.

DC injection braking Set the DC injection braking time at stop.

time at stop Use when stopping if rotations continue due 0.00
b2-04 to momentum. to 0.50 s No A
Set to 0.00 to disable DC injection braking 10.00
DCInj Time @Stop
time at stop.

6-10
 Stopping Methods

„Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor deceler-
ates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-17 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.

Run command

Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
DC injection brake

DC injection brake
time when
stopping (b2-04)

Fig 6.12 Deceleration to Stop

„Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop.

Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency

Inverter output frequency interrupted

Fig 6.13 Coast to Stop

After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.

INFO

6-11
 „DC Braking Stop
After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) is elapsed, DC injection will be
applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2-02. The DC injection
brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.

DC injection brake time

Run command
ON OFF b2-04 x 10
Output frequency

Inverter output voltage interrupted

DC injection brake
b2-04
Minimum baseblock Output frequency at
DC injection brake tim e stop command input
time (L2-03)

10% 100% (maximum output frequency

Fig 6.14 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop

Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.

INFO

„Coast to Stop with Timer

If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until
the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and
the deceleration time.

Operation wait time T

Run command
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output frequency

Inverter output voltage interrupted

Minimum baseblock
Operation wait time T time (L2-03) Output frequency at
stop command input

Minimum output frequency 100% (Maximum output frequency)

Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop with Timer

6-12
 Stopping Methods

‹ Using the DC Injection Brake

Set parameter b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Applying DC injection
at start will stop the motor before starting, if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

DC injection braking current

Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percentage of 0 to
b2-02 50% No A
the Inverter rated current. 100
DCInj Current

DC injection braking time at

start Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
0.00
start.
b2-03 to 0.00 s No A
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set
10.00
DCInj Time@Start value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.

„Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals

If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1- ††
) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can
apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake com-
mand has been set, when the Inverter is being stopped.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.

DC injection brake command

FRUN

Output frequency

DC injection brake E1-09 b2-01 DC injection brake

If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal or if the run command
and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled and operation will resume.

Fig 6.16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart

6-13
 ‹ Using Highslip braking
When the system is operating, the Inverter is delivering an amount of electrical energy to the motor, this
energy is transformed into mechanical and thermal energy.
As a generator, the motor efficiency is still high. Most of the energy returns to the Inverter as current flow.
This regenerated current is stored in the DC bus capacitors, increasing the DC bus voltage. If the regenerated
energy is bigger than the Inverter losses (10% or less) the DC bus will increase to a level where the braking
resistor starts working. If no braking resistor is installed the DC voltage will increase up to a level where the
Inverter operation will be stopped and an overvoltage (OV) is shown.

„Related parameters
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description 485
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion
High-slip brak-
ing decelera- Sets the frequency width for
tion frequency deceleration during high-slip
n3-01 width braking in percent, taking the 1 to 20 5% No A 588H
HSB Decel Maximum Frequency (E1-04) as
Width 100%.
High-slip brak-
ing current Sets the current limit for decelera-
limit tion during high-slip braking in
percent, taking the motor rated 100 to
n3-02 150% No A 589H
HSB Current current as 100%. The resulting 200
Ref limit must be 150% of the Inverter
rated current or less.

High-slip brak-
ing stop dwell Sets the dwell time for the output
time frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz) dur-
0.0 to
n3-03 ing V/f control. 1.0 s No A 58AH
10.0
HSB Dwel-
Effective only during deceleration
Tim@Stp for high-slip braking.

High-slip brak-
ing OL time Set the OL time when the output
frequency does not change for 30 to
n3-04 40 s No A 58BH
some reason during deceleration 1200
HSB Ol Time for high-slip braking.

Terminal sel
H1-01 S3-S7 400H
- Multifunction Digital Inputs 0 to 77 No A to
H1-05 Terminal sel 404H
S3-S7

6-14
 Stopping Methods

„The concept of HSB

If we want to stop very fast without using a braking resistor, the only way is to reduce the amount of current
regeneration. This is done by reducing the motor efficiency. Most of the energy will be dissipated as heat
within the motor and just a little bit of energy is regenerated to the Inverter.
The way to reduce the motor efficiency is to force a high slip in the motor and keep it working in the non-lin-
ear zone of its Torque/slip curve.

Generator Mode

Core Loss

Input Power

Motor
Braking Mode
Mode

Net power
returned to
source=0

Fig 6.17 Torque/ slip curve

The normal behaviour is to work in the linear area with a small slip (s<<1).

High Slip Braking Procedure

• 1. When HSB is applied, suddenly you output frequency will decrease to half of the actual value. That
means that you are working at the point of Torque/slip curve near S=0.5. This is the low efficiency area
and the mechanical energy is dissipated mainly as thermal losse in the motor. As the electrical regeneration
is low the DC voltage does not increase.
The voltage applied to the motor is the corresponding voltage according the V/f curve. The voltage might
be higher if the regenerated current is bigger than the value programmed in N3-02.
As the mechanical speed is approaching the output frequency, the slip is decreasing and the motor is going
back to the linear zone where it increases efficiency.

• 2. When the motor is in the linear area of the Torque/slip curve (normal behaviour) the efficiency is high
and the regenaration to the inverter is big. This causes the increase of the DC bus. If the DC voltage
reaches the Overvoltage (OV) level the inverter reduces suddenly the frequency, according the value pro-
grammed in N3-01 and returning to the High slip/ low efficiency zone of the Torque/slip curve and the
process of step 1 is repeated.

6-15
 • 3. This step is not always necessary. If step 2 is not sufficient enough to stop the motor and the DC volt-
age increases again, the inverter takes an other action similar like step 2.

After these steps the inverter runs during 1.5s at minimum speed and decellerates to zero following the pro-
grammed ramp. This last process is to be sure that the output frequency decreases to zero so that the linear
area of the Torque/slip curve is reached.

The motor will overheat with this stopping method. Be carefull to guarantee good ventilation to the
motor. Most AC motors have a thermal resistor or a clixon built in.
It is strogly recommended to use the thermal resistor in case of overheating

‹ Using an Emergency Stop

Set a multi-function input terminal (H1- ††
) to 28 to 2B (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the decel-
eration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with a NO contact, set the multi-function input ter-
minal (H1- †† ) to 28 or 2A or if inputting the emergency stop with a NC contact, set the multi-function input
terminal (H1- †† ) to 29 or 2B.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Emergency stop time The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is ON. 0.0 to
C1-09 10.0 s No A
This time will be used when a fault is detected, for which 6000.0
Fast Stop Time emergency stop was programmed.

6-16
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

‹ Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum out-
put frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100% to
0% of (E1-04). The factory setting of the acceleration time is C1-01 and the factory setting of the deceleration
time is C1-02.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Acceleration time 1 Set the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maxi-
C1-01 Yes Q
Accel Time 1 mum output frequency, in 1-second units.
Deceleration time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output fre-
C1-02 Yes Q
Decel Time 1 quency to fall from 100% to 0%.
0.0 to
Acceleration time 2 Acceleration time when multi-function input "Accelera- 10.0 s
6000.0
C1-03 Yes A
Accel Time 2 tion/deceleration time selection 1" is ON.
Deceleration time 2 Deceleration time when multi-function input "Accelera-
C1-04 tion/deceleration time selection 1" is ON. Yes A
Decel Time 2

Acceleration/deceleration Set the frequency at which acceleration/deceleration time

time switching frequency switches automatically.
Less than set frequency: Acceleration/deceleration time 2
Set frequency or above: Acceleration/deceleration time 1 0.0 to
C1-11 0.0 Hz No A
Multi-function inputs "Acceleration/deceleration time 120.0
Acc.Dec SW Freq selection 1" and "Acceleration/deceleration time selection
2" are given priority.

Set the S-curve characteristic time for each part in sec-

S-curve characteristic time at
onds.
acceleration start
When you set the S-curve characteristic time, the start time
and end time S-curve characteristic time's acceleration 0.00 to
C2-01 0.20 s No A
time is lengthened by 1/2 only. 2.50
SCrv Acc@Start
Run
command OFF
ON
Output frequency
S-curve characteristic time at C2-02
acceleration end
C2-01
0.00 to
C2-02 0.20 s No A
2.50
Time
SCrv Dec@ End
The S-curve characteristic time at start and end of deceler-
ation is fixed to 0.2 sec. and can not be changed.

„Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal Com-
mands
Using the SYSDRIVE PV, you can set two acceleration times and two deceleration times. When the multi-
function input terminals (H1-oo) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1), you can switch the
acceleration/deceleration time even during operation.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
Selection 1 Terminal
OFF C1-01 C1-02
ON C1-03 C1-04

6-17
 „Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the output fre-
quency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.

Output frequency

Acceleration/decele-
ration time switching
frequency (C1-11)

C1-03 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-04 rate

When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 2 (C1-03, C1-04).

Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency

„Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time

By performing acceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting the machine.
By using the SYSDRIVE PV inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: At
acceleration start and at acceleration end.
For deceleration start and deceleration end the S-curve characteristic times are fixed to 0.2 sec. They can not
be switched off or changed.

When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:

Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
INFO

6-18
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

‹ Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention During
Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied
to the motor or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-
02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this
setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Stall prevention selection dur- 0: Disabled (Accelerates according to the setting. Motor
ing acceleration may stall if the load is too high.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stops when the level set in L3-
02 is exceeded. Acceleration continues when current
L3-01 0 to 2 1 No A
value is reduced.)
StallP Accel Sel 2: Optimum adjustment (Adjusts acceleration using the
level set in L3-02 as the standard. The acceleration
time setting is ignored.)

Stall prevention level during

acceleration Set as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current to be
100%.
L3-02 0 to 200 120% No A
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting. Lower
StallP Accel Lvl the set value if the motor stalls using the factory setting.

6-19
 „Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.

Output current

Stall level during

acceleration

Time
Output frequency

Output frequency is controlled

to prevent the motor stalling.

Time

Fig 6.19 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration

„Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the motor is operated using the fac-
tory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the parameter output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
• Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.

Stall prevention level during

acceleration

L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during

Acceleration)

L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during

Acceleration)

Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)

Fig 6.20 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration

6-20
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

‹ Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During Decelera-

tion Function)
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid over-
voltage tripping.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Acess
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Stall prevention selec- 0: Disabled (Motor decelerates according to setting. When the
tion during deceleration deceleration time is short, there is a risk of DC bus overvol-
function selection tage (0V) occurring.)
1: Enabled (Prevents deceleration when DC bus voltage rea-
ches the overvoltage level. Deceleration restarts after
L3-04 0 to 2 1 No A
voltage has been restored.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Minimizes deceleration judging from
DC bus voltage. The deceleration time setting is ignored.)
StallP Decel Sel If using the dynamic brake option (Braking Resistor Units and
Braking Units), be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0.

„Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below
.

Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to

prevent overvoltage

Time

Deceleration time
(set value)

Fig 6.21 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation

„Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and the input
voltage. Refer to the following table for details.
Inverter Rated/Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
200 V class 380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V 760
400 V class
E1-01 < 400 V 660
• When using the braking option (Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units), be sure to set parameter L3-04
to 0.

6-21
 Adjusting Frequency References

‹ Adjusting Analog Frequency References

Gain and bias are among the parameters used to adjust analog inputs.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Frequency reference (volt-
age) terminal A1 input gain Set the frequency during 10 V input as a percentage, tak- 0.0 to
H3-02 100.0% Yes A
ing max. output frequency to be 100%. 1000.0
Term A1 Lvl Sel
Frequency reference (volt- -100.0
age) terminal A1 input bias Set the frequency during 0 V input as a percentage, taking
H3-03 to 0.0% Yes A
max. output frequency to be 100%.
Terminal A1 Bias +100.0

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 signal level selec-
0: 0 to +10V input.
tion
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
H3-08 0 or 2 2 No A
Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on
Term A2 Signal the control panel.

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 function selection Select multi-function analog input function for terminal
H3-09 0 to 1F 0 No A
A2.
Terminal A2 Sel
Multi-function analog input
(current) terminal A2 input
Set the reference capacity for each function during 10 V
gain
(20 mA) input as a percentage. 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A
Set the 100% content function selected using H3-09 to 1000.0
Terminal A2 Gain 100%.

Multi-function analog input

(current) terminal A2 input
Set the reference capacity for each function during 0 V (4
bias -100.0
mA) input as a percentage.
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A
Set the 100% content function selected using H3-09 to
+100.0
Terminal A2 BIas 100%.

„Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters

The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using parameters H3-02
and H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform
adjustments using H3-10 and H3-11.

Frequency reference Frequency reference

Terminal A1 Terminal A2 input

input voltage voltage (current)

Terminal A1 input Terminal A2 input

Fig 6.22 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs

6-22
 Adjusting Frequency References

„Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input

When H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using an analog input.

Frequency gain

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level

Fig 6.23 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)

The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set
to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.

Frequency reference

terminal A1 input voltage

„Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input

When parameter H3-09 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input volt-
age is added to A1 as a bias.

Frequency bias

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level

Fig 6.24 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)

For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0% and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.

6-23
 Frequency reference

Terminal A1 input voltage

‹ Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)

• This function allows the prohibition or „jumping“ of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output fre-
quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.
• It is also used for deadband control.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD DIsplay Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Jump frequency 1

d3-01 0.0 Hz No A

Jump Freq 1

Set the frequency center value at which to prohibit set-

tings.
Jump frequency 2
Set to 0.0 to disable the jump frequency.
Make sure the settings are as follows: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3- 0.0 to
d3-02 0.0 Hz No A
03. 120.0
Jump Freq 2 Operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited.
Changes during acceleration and deceleration are made
gradually without performing jumps.

Jump frequency 3

d3-03 0.0 Hz No A

Jump Freq 3

Jump frequency width Set the jump frequency width in hertz.

0.0 to
d3-04 The jump frequency range is as follows: (Jump frequency 1.0 Hz No A
20.0
Jump Bandwith ±d3-04).

6-24
 Adjusting Frequency References

The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:

Output
frequency

Frequency reference descending

Jump Bandwidth d3-04

Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
Jump Bandwidth
Bandwidth d3-04
d3-04

Jump frequency reference

Jump freq Jump freq Jump freq
3 (d3-03) 2 (d3-02) 1 (d3-01)

Fig 6.25 Jump Frequency

„Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When parameters d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.

6-25
 Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)

‹ Limiting Maximum Output Frequency

If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use parameter d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output
Frequency) to be 100%.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Frequency reference
upper limit Set the output frequency upper limit, taking the 0.0 to
d2-01 100.0% No A
max. output frequency to be 100%. 110.0
Ref Upper Limit

‹ Limiting Minimum Frequency

If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use parameters d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Frequency reference
lower limit Set the output frequency lower limit, taking the 0.0 to
d2-02 0.0% No A
base reference to be 100%. 110.0
Ref Lower LImit
Master speed reference
lower limit Set the master speed reference lower limit, taking 0.0 to
d2-03 0.0% No A
the max. output frequency to be 100%. 110.0
Ref1 Lower Limit

Zero speed setting

If zerospeed setting is set within parameter H2-01 or H2-02, option 1 , the Inverter will operate at the set
minimumfrequency level programmed in parameter E1-09. One of the programmed outputs will close its
contact.

6-26
 Improved Operating Efficiency

Improved Operating Efficiency

This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.

‹ Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed Operation (Torque

Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased and increases the output torque.
The Torque Compensation function calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the out-
put voltage (V) and compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate
the compensation voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss x parameter C4-01.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Torque compensation Set the torque compensation gain using the multiplication
gain factor. Normally, there is no need to set this parameter.
Adjust the torque compensation gain in the following cir-
cumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
0.00 to
C4-01 • If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller 1.00 Yes A
2.50
than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
Torq Comp Gain • If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this parameter so that the output current during
low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated out-
put current range.

Torque compensation Set the primary delay for the torque compensation function
primary delay time in ms.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust this 0 to
C4-02 200 ms No A
parameter in the following circumstances. 10000
Torq Comp Time • If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.

„Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain

Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment.
Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.

Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter’s rated
output current range.

„Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time parameter

Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the parameter as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.

6-27
 ‹ Field weakening option
The field weakening function is used to reduce the output voltage to the motor when the following conditions
are matched:
• The frequency reference is above the value set in d6-02.
• Speed agree is matched.
• A digital input (H1-01 to H1-05) is set to 63.

In this case the output voltage is set to the value programmed in parameter d6-01 as a percentage of the corre-
sponding value for this frequency in the V/f curve.

„Related parameters
Name Change
Param- RS-422A/
Setting Factory during Access
eter LCD Description 485
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display Register
tion

Set the Inverter output voltage

Field weaken- when the field weakening com-
ing level
mand is input.
It is enabled when the field weak-
0 to
d6-01 ening command is set for a multi- 80% No A 2A0H
100
function input.
Field-Weak
Lvl
Set the level as a percentage tak-
ing the voltage set in the V/f pat-
tern as 100%.

Field fre- Set the lower limit in Hz of the

quency frequency range where field con-
trol is valid.
The field weakening command is 0.0 to
d6-02 0.0 Hz No A 2A1H
valid only at frequencies above 120.0
Field-Weak
Freq this setting and only when the
speed is in agreement with the
current speed reference.
H1-01 400H
Terminal sel
- Multifunction Digital Inputs 0 to 77 No A to
S3-S7
H1-05 404H

Advantage of the function

• Reducing the output voltage in quadratic loads is a simple way to save energy.
• Having better speed and torque stability at frequencies near or above motor rated frequency.

Decreasing the voltage means decreasing the maximum torque in the same percentage.
However if the voltage is decreased only during speed agree, then the rated torque can be kept during
acceleration and deceleration.

6-28
 Improved Operating Efficiency

‹ Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- LCD Description
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number Display tion

Hunting-prevention 0: Hunting-prevention function disabled

function selection 1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when
N1-01 0 or 1 1 No A
the motor is operating with a light load.
Hunt Prev Select If high response is to be given priority over vibration sup-
pression, disable the hunting-prevention function.

Hunting-prevention gain Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication factor.

Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
0.00 to
N1-02 • If vibration occurs with light load, increase the setting. 1.00 No A
2.50
• If the motor stalls, reduce the setting.
Hunt Prev Gain If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too sup-
pressed and the motor may stall.

6-29
 Machine Protection

‹ Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation

Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the
motor speed is reduced. Set the enable or disable deceleration time using parameter L3-05. Set the decelera-
tion time using C1-02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set fre-
quency.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Stall prevention selec- 0: Disabled (Operates according to the setting. Motor
tion during running func- may stall when the load is large.)
tion selection 1: Enabled--Deceleration time 1 (Stall prevention func-
tion during operation deceleration time is set in C1-
L3-05 0 to 2 1 No A
02.)
StallP Run Sel 2: Enabled--Deceleration time 2 (Stall prevention func-
tion during operation deceleration time is set in C1-
04.)

Stall prevention level

Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. Set as a percentage,
during running
taking Inverter rated current to be 100%.
L3-06 Normally, there is no need to make this setting. 30 to 200 120% No A
Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory set-
StallP Run Level ting.

‹ Detecting Motor Torque

If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque),
you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2 or M3-M4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B or 17 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/NC)
in one of the following parameters: H2-01 and H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4
function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%).

6-30
 Machine Protection

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Torque detection selec- 1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; oper-
tion 1 ation continues after overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation;
operation continues after overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; out-
put stopped upon detection (protected operation).
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation;
L6-01 output stopped upon detection (protected operation). 0 to 8 0 No A
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement;
operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Torq Det Sel 6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation;
operation continues after overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; out-
put stopped upon detection (protected operation).
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation;
output stopped upon detection (protected operation).

Torque detection level 1

L6-02 V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%. 0 to 300 150% No A
Toq Det 1 Lvl

Torque detection time 1

0.0 to
L6-03 Set the overtorque/undertorque detection time. 0.1 s No A
Torq Det 1 Time 10.0

Multi-function Output (H2-01 and H2-02)

Set
Function
Value
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
B
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
17
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)

„L6-01 Set Values and LED Indicators

The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected and the set values in L6-01, is shown in the following table.
LED Indicator
Set
Function Overtorque/Undertorque
Value
Detection 1
0 Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled. -
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
1 OL3 flashes
overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
2 OL3 flashes
after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detec-
3 OL3 lit
tion (protected operation).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
4 OL3 lit
detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
5 UL3 flashes
overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
6 UL3 flashes
after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
7 UL3 lit
detection (protected operation).

6-31
 LED Indicator
Set
Function Overtorque/Undertorque
Value
Detection 1
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
8 UL3 lit
detection (protected operation).

„Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection

Motor current

L6-02

Overtorque detection 1 NO L6-03 L6-03

*Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.

• Undertorque Detection

Motor current (output torque)

L6-02

Overtorque detection 1 NO L6-03 L6-03

*Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.

6-32
 Machine Protection

‹ Motor Overload Protection

You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Control
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Methods
Number
tion

Motor rated current

Set the motor rated current. 0.32 to
1.90 A
E2-01 This set value becomes the base value for motor protection 6.40 No Q
*1
and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning. *2
Motor Rated FLA

Motor protection selec- Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection
tion function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
With applications where the power supply is often turned
L1-01 0 or 1 1 No Q
ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be pro-
MOL Fault Select tected even if this parameter has been set to 1, as the ther-
mal value will be reset. If multiple motors are connected to
one Inverter, set this parameter to 0 and install a thermal
relay in each motor.

Motor protection time

Set the electronic thermal detection time in minutes.
parameter
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
0.1 to
L1-02 The factory setting is resistance at 150% for 1 min. 1.0 min No A
5.0
If the motor overload resistance is clear, set the overload
MOL Time Const resistance protection time during hot start to suit the motor.

* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The shown values are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)

Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 and H2-02)

Set
Function
Value
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)

„Setting Motor Rated Current

Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameter E2-01 (for motor 1).

„Motor Overload Protection Characteristics

Set the overload protection function L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.

6-33
 L1-01 Electronic Thermal
Set Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability Operation (at 100%
Value Motor Load)

Rated rotation speed

Short time 60s
= 100% speed
3.7 kW max.
5.5 to 15 kW Use this motor for
When operating continu-
18.5 kW min. operations using a
ously at 50/60 Hz or less,
Torque (%) 80% ED or Frame number Max. commercial power
General-purpose 30 min. speed of 200 LJ min. motor overload detection
50% ED or 30 min. supply. This motor
1 motor (standard Continuous (OL1) is detected. The
Frame construction yields
motor) nu m be r Inverter outputs the error
M ax . best cooling effect
speed of Frame number Max.
200 LJ speed of 160 MJ to
contact and the motor
min. 180 LJ
when operating at 50/
Frame number coasts to a stop.
Max. speed of 60 Hz.
132 MJ

Rotation speed (%)

„Setting Motor Protection Operation Time

Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 120% overload is experienced, set the (hot
start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 120% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)

Operating time (min.)

Cold start

Hot start

Motor current (%)

E2-01 is set to 100%

Fig 6.26 Motor Protection Operation Time

„Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set parameter L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor,
install a thermal relay in the motor power cable and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit can-
not be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• For save overload tripping, set the set value in parameter L1-02 to a low setting.

• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below
the rated current. If operating on the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.

„Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to 1) and you set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-
function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the

6-34
 Machine Protection

motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the over-
load detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.

‹ Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs

Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Alarm operation selection dur- Set H3-09 to E and select the operation when the input
ing motor overheating motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm
detection level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
L1-03 0 to 3 3 No A
1: Coast to stop
Mtr OH Alarm Sel 2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (OH3 on the Digital Operator
flashes).

Motor overheating operation Set H3-09 to E and select the operation when the motor
selection temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the operation
detection level (2.34 V).
L1-04 0 to 2 1 No A
0: Decelerate to stop
Mtr OH Fault Sel 1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.

Motor temperature input filter

time parameter
Set H3-09 to E and set the primary delay time parameter 0.00 to
L1-05 0.20 s No A
for motor temperature (thermistor) inputs in seconds. 10.00
Mtr Temp Filter

„PTC Thermistor Characteristics

The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.

Class F Class H
Resistance (Ohms)

Tr: Temperature threshold value

Temperatue

Fig 6.27 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics

6-35
 „Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in parameters L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter
time parameter in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digi-
tal Operator.

Error Codes If the Motor Overheats

Error Code Details
OH3 Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature
input), you can detect alarm OH3 or OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics and protect the
motor. The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram.

Inverter
Multi-function Multi-function
contact input contact output

Fault contact
output
Branch resistance
18 kΩ *1 Multi-function
PHC output

PTC thermistor

*1
The resistance value of 18 kΩ is only valid for using a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic
shown on the previous page.

Fig 6.28 Mutual Connections for Motor Overheating Protection

Setting Precautions
• When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal board
has to be turned to OFF (A2 voltage input). The factory setting is ON (A2 current input).
• The parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V input).

6-36
 Continuing Operation

Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a
momentary power loss.

‹ Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored

After a momentary power loss, the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is recovered, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is recovered within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the power
loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is recovered while the control power supply (i.e., power sup-
ply to the control circuit) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit under-
voltage) will not be detected.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Momentary power loss detec- 0: Disabled (main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection)
tion 1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L2-02 is exceeded, main circuit
L2-01 undervoltage detection.) 0 to 2 0 No A
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power
PwrL Selection returns during control operations. Does not detect
main circuit undervoltage.)
Momentary power loss ride-
thru time Ridethrough time, when momentary power loss selection 0.1 s
L2-02 0 to 2.0 No A
(L2-01) is set to 1. *1
PwrL Ridethru t

Min. baseblock (BB) time Set the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time; when the
Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times of the motor sec-
L2-03 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s No A
ondary circuit time parameter.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs during a speed
PwrL Baseblock t search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.

Voltage recovery time Set the time required to return the Inverter output voltage
to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search. 0.0 to
L2-04
Set the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum 5.0 0.3 s*1 No A
PwrL V/f Ramp t voltage.

Undervoltage (UV) detection

Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
level
(main circuit DC voltage). 150 to
L2-05 Usually changing this setting is not necessary. 190 V No A
210 *2
Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter input side to lower the *2
PUV Det Level main circuit undervoltage detection level.

* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.

„Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from
the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss
exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.

6-37
 ‹ Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting without control and then starts
smoothly from that speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to
enabled.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Speed search selection Enables/disables the speed search function for the RUN com-
(current detection or mand and sets the speed search method.
speed calculation) 0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation
b3-01 When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and 0 to 4 2*1 No A
acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated
Slip Comp Gain speed to the specified frequency (motor direction is also sear-
ched).
Current Detection
The speed search is started from the frequency when power
was momentarily lost or the maximum frequency and the
speed is detected when the set search current level is reached.
Speed search operating
current (current detec- Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking
tion) the Inverter rated current as 100%. 0 to
b3-02 120% No A
Not usually necessary to set. When restarting is not possible 200
SpdSrch Current with the factory settings, reduce the value.

Speed search decelera-

tion time (current detec- Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed
tion) search. 0.1 to
b3-03 2.0 s No A
Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output fre- 10.0
SpdSrch Dec Time quency to the minimum output frequency.

Speed search wait time

(current detection or Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contac-
speed calculation) tor on the output side of the Inverter. When a speed search is 0.0 to
b3-05 0.2 s No A
performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the 20.0
Search Delay search operation is delayed by the time set here.

Min. baseblock time Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time, when the inverter
is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor secondary
L2-03
circuit time parameter.
0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s *1 No A
PwrL Baseblock t If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.

Voltage recovery time Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the completion of a speed search. 0.0 to
L2-04
Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum 5.0 0.3 s*2 No A
PwrL V/f Ramp t voltage.

* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)

6-38
 Continuing Operation

Multi-function Contact Inputs

Set Access
Function
Value Level
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
61 Yes
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed and start search from estimated speed)
Current detection (Start speed search from maximum output frequency)

External search command 2

OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed and start search from estimated speed) (Same operation as external
62 Yes
search command 1)
Current detection: Start speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search command was
input).

External search command 3

OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed and start search from estimated speed) (Same operation as external
64 Yes
search command 1)
Current detection: Start speed search from output frequency (reference frequency when search command was
input).

„Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error will occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the run com-
mand and external search command are both ON. This two commands must be kept on, at least for the
time set in parameter L2-03.
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time
by setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search.
• Parameter b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When
the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed and the motor acceler-
ates or decelerates to the set frequency.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after power recovery, lengthen the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).

„Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed

• Always perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on esti-
mated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form autotuning again.

6-39
 „Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at start and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or cur-
rent detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to 1
or 3.

Table 6.1 Search Methods

Search Name Estimated Speed Current Detection
Estimates the motor speed when the search Starts speed search from the frequency when
starts and accelerates and decelerates from the the temporary power loss was detected or from
Search Method estimated speed to the set frequency. You can the highest frequency and performs speed
also search including direction of motor rota- detection by watching the current level during
tion. the search.
External speed search command 1:
External search command 1 and external Starts speed search from the maximum output
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation, frequency.
Command estimating the motor speed and starting the External speed search command 2:
search from the estimated speed. Starts speed search from the frequency refer-
ence set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
Application Precau- The motor may accelerate suddenly with light
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capac-
tions loads.
ity.

„Estimated Speed Search

The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.

Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown
below.

OFF ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03 Set frequency
Run command
reference
Set using
speed detected
Output frequency

b 3 -0 2

Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s *Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*

Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop and the run command turns ON in a
short time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.

Fig 6.29 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)

6-40
 Continuing Operation

Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)

AC power supply ON OFF Set frequency

Start using
reference
speed detected

Output current
10 ms

*1. Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency

immediately before the baseblock.
*2. After AC power supply recorvery, motor waits for the
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1 minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).

Fig 6.30 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)

• Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)

AC power supply OFF Start using speed detected

ON
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency

Output current
10 ms

Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time

(L2-03) (b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.

Fig 6.31 Speed Search after Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)

6-41
 „Current Detection Speed Search
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.

OFF ON Deceleration time set in b3-03

Run command
Maximum output Set fequency
frequency or reference
set frequency
Output frequency

b3-02

Output current

Minimum baseblock time* * Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
(L2-03)

Fig 6.32 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)

Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time

AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Deceleration time Set fequency
set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current

Output current

*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output

frequency immediately before baseblock.
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)*1 *2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for
the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
*2

Fig 6.33 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)

• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time

AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Set fequency
Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference

Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time

Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)

Minimum baseblock time*

(L2-03)

Fig 6.34 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)

6-42
 Continuing Operation

‹ Continuing Operation at parameter Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost

The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation at reduced speed using the set value in
parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value. When using an analog input as frequency reference, a fre-
quency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops over 90 % in 400 ms or less.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function
contact output terminal M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Operation when fre-
quency reference is 0: Stop
missing 1: Operation (L4-06*fref@loss) inverter runs with reduced
L4-05 speed. 0 or 1 0 No A
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference dropped
Ref Loss Sel
over 90% in 400 ms.
Output frequency adjust-
ment after freq. refer- If L4-05 is set to 1 and the reference is lost, inverter will
ence loss run at:
L4-06 0 – 100% 80% No A
fout = L4-06*fref
Fref at Floss before lossing.

‹ Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)

If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in parameter L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protec-
tion function will operate and the auto restart function will not work.
• OC (Overcurrent) • LF (Output phase failure)
• GF (Ground fault) • OL1 (Motor overload)
• PUF (Fuse blown) • OL2 (Inverter overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage) • OH1 (Motor overheat)

• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)* • OL3 (Overtorque)

• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)

* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)

„Auto Restart External Outputs

To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2
and M3-M4 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).

6-43
 „Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Number of auto restart
Set the number of auto restarts attempts.
attempts
L5-01 Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed 0 to 10 0 No A
Num of Restarts search from the run frequency.
Auto restart operation Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during
selection fault restart.
L5-02 0 or 1 0 No A
0: No output (Fault contact is not activated.)
Restart Sel 1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)

„ Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed and the error has been verified and an error reset
has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF and then ON again.

6-44
 Inverter Protection

Inverter Protection

‹ Reducing Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Warning Levels

The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fin using the thermistor and protects the Inverter from
overheating.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection and
continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fin overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Overheat pre-alarm level Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat
detection pre-alarm in °C.
L8-02 50 to 130 95°C No A
The pre-alarm is detected when the cooling fin tempera-
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl ture reaches the set value.

Inverter overheat (OH) pre- Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre-
alarm operation selection alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
L8-03 0 to 3 3 No A
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
OH-Pre-Alarm Sel A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will
be given in setting 3.

6-45
 Input Terminal Functions

‹ Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit

Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an input from H1-01 to H1-
05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selec-
tion).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Reference selection Set the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator
b1-01 1: Control circuit terminal (analog input) 0 to 3 1 No Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Reference Source 3: Option Card

Operation method selection Set the run command input method

0: Digital Operator
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1 No Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Run Source 3: Option Card

You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO

‹ Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)

Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact
input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF
operation and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from the frequency reference value
before the baseblock command was input.

Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set
Function
Value
8 External baseblock NO (Normally Open contact: Baseblock when ON)

9 External baseblock NC (Normally Closed contact: Baseblock when OFF)

6-46
 Input Terminal Functions

„Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.

Forward operation/Stop
Input Cleared
Baseblock command

Frequency reference

Search from stored frequency reference

Output frequency

Coast to a stop

Fig 6.35 Baseblock Commands

If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during
operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting and and may result in the motor falling or
slipping.
• Always use base block command when a contactor between inverter and motor is installed.
IMPORTANT

‹ Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing

When one of H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the
terminal is turned ON and and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.

The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.

Sample/hold
command

Analog input

Frequency reference

Fig 6.36 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency

„Application Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precau-
tions.
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency reference, be sure to store reference for 100 ms mini-
mum. If the sample/hold time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.

6-47
 ‹ Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Cir-
cuit Terminals
You can switch frequency reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit
terminals. Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function
selection) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF sta-
tus when the Inverter is stopped.

„Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the
following parameters.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal [sequence inputs])
• Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selec-
tion) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
Inverter
OFF (Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input termi-
nal.)
Communications Option Card
ON
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)

‹ Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/

RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Jog frequency reference

The frequency reference when the jog frequency reference 0 to
d1-17 6.00 Hz Yes Q
selection, FJOG command or RJOG command is ON. 120.00
Jog Reference

Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set
Function
Value
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)

13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)

6-48
 Input Terminal Functions

„Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).

‹ Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter

(External Error Function)
The external error function performs the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input
terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external error signal. For
example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05
(multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External error detection method
• Operation during external error detection

The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-oo.
Input Level Error Detection Method
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 1.) (See Note 2.)
Set Emer-
Detection Deceler- Coast to Continue
Value NO Con- NC Con- Parameter gency
During ate to Stop Stop Operation
tact tact Detection Stop
Operation (Error) (Error) (Warning)
(Error)
20 Yes Yes Yes
21 Yes Yes Yes
22 Yes Yes Yes
23 Yes Yes Yes
24 Yes Yes Yes
25 Yes Yes Yes
26 Yes Yes Yes
27 Yes Yes Yes
28 Yes Yes Yes
29 Yes Yes Yes
2A Yes Yes Yes
2B Yes Yes Yes
2C Yes Yes Yes
2D Yes Yes Yes
2E Yes Yes Yes
2F Yes Yes Yes
Note1.Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either parameter detection or detection during operation.
parameter detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.

6-49
 Monitor Parameters

‹ Using the Analog Monitor Parameters

This section explains the analog monitor parameters.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter- Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Monitor selection (terminal

FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-††)
H4-01 at terminal FM. 1 to 38 2 No A
4,10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
Terminal FM Sel

Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (FM) voltage level

Gain (terminal FM)
gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in
H4-02 0 ~ 100% 100% Yes Q
multiples of 10 V.
Terminal FM Gain The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter
calibration function is available.

Bias (terminal FM) Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a
-110.0 ~
H4-03 percentage of 10 V. 0.0% Yes A
+110.0%
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter
Terminal FM Bias
calibration function is available.

Monitor selection (terminal

AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
H4-04 †† ) from terminal AM. 1 to 38 3 No A
4,10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set.
Terminal AM Sel

Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output

Gain (terminal AM)
2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the
H4-05 0 ~ 100% 50% Yes Q
100% output for the monitor items. The maimum output
Terminal AM Gain from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is
available.

Bias (terminal AM) Set the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a
-110.0 ~
H4-06 percentage of 10 V. 0.0% Yes A
+110.0%
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter
Terminal AM Bias calibration function is available.

Analog output 1 signal level

selection (FM) Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1
(terminal FM)
H4-07 0 or 2 0 No A
0: 0 to 10 V output
AO Level Select 1 2: 4 to 20 mA

Analog output signal 2 level Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2
selection (AM) (terminal FM)
H4-08 0 or 2 0 No A
0: 0 to 10 V output
AO Level Select 2
2: 4 to 20 mA

„Selecting Analog Monitor Items

The digital operator monitor items (U1-oo [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output ter-
minals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters and set the values for the †† part of U1-††
(status monitor).

6-50
 Monitor Parameters

„Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items

Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05 and H4-06.

Adjusting the Meter

The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown in Fig. 6.51.
10 V/100% monitor output x output gain + output bias

Output voltage

Gain x 10 V

Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item

Fig 6.37 Monitor Output Adjustment

6-51
 Individual Functions
RS-422A/485 communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial com-
munications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond.
The master performs serial communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address
of each slave before, so that the master can perform serial communications using that address. Slaves receiv-
ing commands from the master perform the specified function and send a response to the master.

SYSMAC-series PLC

Inverter Inverter Inverter

Fig 6.38 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter

„Communications Specifications
The RS-422A/485 communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Specifications
Interface RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 and 19,200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Communications Parameters
Parity: Select from even, odd or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit selected
Communications Protocol RS-422A/485
Number of Connectable Units 31 units max.

„Communications Connection Terminal

RS-422A/485 communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+ and R-. Set the terminating resistance
by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.

RS-422A S1 Terminating
or RS-485 O 1 resistance
F
F 2
Switch

Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)

Fig 6.39 Communications Connection Terminal

6-52
 Individual Functions

1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables and use proper shield clamps
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+ and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior. See pic-
ture.
IMPORTANT

„Procedure for Communicating with the PLC

Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications parameters (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.

6-53
 „Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Reference selection Set the frequency reference input method

0: Digital Operator
b1-01 1: Control circuit terminal (analog input) 0 to 3 1 No Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Reference Source 3: Option Card

Operation method selection Set the run command input method

0: Digital Operator
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1 No Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
RunSource 3: Option Card

Slave address
H5-01 Set the Inverter station address [hex]. 0 to 20 1F No A
Serial Comm Adr
Set the baud rate for 6CN RS-422A/485 communications.
Baud rate selection
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
H5-02 0 to 4 3 No A
2: 4800 bps
Serial Baud Rate 3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communications parity selec- Set the parity for 6CN RS-422A/485 communications.
tion 0: No parity
H5-03 0 to 2 0 No A
1: Even parity
Serial Comm Sel 2: Odd parity
Communication error detec- Set the stopping method for communications errors.
tion selection 0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1-02
H5-04 1: Coast to a stop 0 to 3 3 No A
Serial Fault Sel 2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-02
3: Continue operation
Communications error detec- Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be
tion selection detected as a communications error.
H5-05 0 or 1 1 No A
0: Do not detect
Serial Flt Dtct 1: Detect

Send wait time

Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the 5 to 65
H5-06 5 ms No A
Transmit wait TIM Inverter starts to send. ms

RTS control ON/OFF Select to enable or disable RTS control.

H5-07 0: Disabled (RTS is always ON) 0 or 1 1 No A
RTS Control Sel 1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)

* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.

RS-422A/485 communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and
b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status of the inverter
• Setting and reading parameters
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands

An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands
input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.

IMPORTANT

6-54
 Individual Functions

„Message Format
In RS-422A/485 communications, the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds. The mes-
sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets is
changed by the command (function) contents.

Slave address (1 byte)

Function code (1 byte)

Communications data

Error check (2 bytes)

The space between messages must support the following:

PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter

Command message Response message Command message

Time (Seconds)

H5-06
24 bits long 24 bits long 5 ms min.
setting

Fig 6.40 Message Spacing

Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).

Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Command Message Response Message
Function Code
Function Min. Max. Min. Max.
(Hexadecimal)
(Bytes) (Bytes) (Bytes) (Bytes)
03H Read storage register contents 8 8 7 37
08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8
10H Write multiple storage registers 11 41 8 8

Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.

Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method:
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the RS-422A/485 system, set
the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC-16 in the
response messages.

6-55
 „RS-422A/485 Message Example
An example of RS-422A/485 command/response messages is given below.

Reading Storage Register Contents

Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities. The addresses must be consecutive,
starting from a specified address. The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and
lower 8 bits.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.

Response Message Response Message

Command Message
(During Normal Operation) (During Error)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H
Start Number of attached
Higher 00H 08H Error code 03H
Address data bytes
(Register-
number) Lower 20H Lead stor- Higher 00H Higher F1H
CRC-16
age register
Quantity Higher 00H Lower 65H Lower 31H
(10H Max) Lower 04H Higher 00H
Next stor-
Higher 45H age register Lower 00H
CRC-16
Lower F0H Next stor- Higher 00H
age register Lower 00H

Next stor- Higher 01H

age register Lower F4H
Higher AFH
CRC-16
Lower 82H

6-56
 Individual Functions

Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.

Response Message Response Message

Command Message
(During Normal Operation) (During Error)
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H
Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H
Test Code Test Code
Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H
CRC-16
Higher A5H Higher A5H Lower 50H
Data Data
Lower 37H Lower 37H
Higher DAH Higher DAH
CRC-16 CRC-16
Lower 8DH Lower 8DH

Writing to Multiple Storage Registers

Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses. The written data must be consecutive,
starting from the specified address in the command message: Higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits, in storage regis-
ter address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency refer-
ence of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.

Response Message Response Message

Command Message
(During Normal Operation) (During Error)
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H

Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H

Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Higher CDH
CRC-16
Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower C1H
Quantity Quantity
Lower 02H Lower 02H
No. of data 04H Higher 10H
CRC-16
Higher 00H Lower 08H
Lead data
Lower 01H
Higher 02H
Next data
Lower 58H * No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
Higher 63H
CRC-16
Lower 39H

Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.

IMPORTANT

6-57
 „Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data and broadcast
data.

Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No. Contents
0000H Reserved
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2 External error 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3 Error reset 1: Reset command
Bit 4 ComNet
0001H Bit 5 ComCtrl
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 3
Bit 7 Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8 Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9 Multi-function input command 6
Bit A Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F Not used
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H Not used
0007H Analog output 1 setting (0 V/0 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
0008H Analog output 2 setting (0 V/0 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Contact output 2 (Terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not used
0009H
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used

6-58
 Individual Functions

Register No. Contents

Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Not used
Bits 3 to B Not used
000FH
C Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Not used
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.

Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No. Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
0020H
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Not used
Bits 8 to F Not used
Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PI feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
0021H
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit A Not used
Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush preven-
Bit C
tion circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D Missing output phase (LF)
Bit E RS-422A/485 communications error (CE)
Bit F Operator disconnected (OPR)

6-59
 Register No. Contents
Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 Not used
0022H Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F Not used
Frequency ref-
0023H Monitors U1-01
erence
Output fre-
0024H Monitors U1-02
quency
0025H Output voltage reference (U1-06)
0026H Output current U1-03
0027H Output power U1-08
0028H Not used
0029H Not used
002AH Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function contact input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function contact input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
002BH Bit 3 Multi-function contact input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 Multi-function contact input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5 Multi-function contact input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function contact input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F Not used

6-60
 Individual Functions

Register No. Contents

Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
002CH Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communication 0: Communication
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communication 0: Communication
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E Error (including RS-422A/485 communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F RS-422A/485 communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
002DH Bit 1 Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not used
Bits 3 to F Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H - 0037H Not used
0038H PI feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H PI input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH PI output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH CPU software number
003CH Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used
003DH Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used
003EH KVA setting

6-61
 Register No. Contents
003FH Not used
Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).

Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Contents
Address
Operation signal
Bit 0 Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External error 1: Error (set using H1-01)
0001H Bit 5 Error reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Bit E Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Bit F Not used.
Frequency ref-
0002H 30000/100%
erence
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.

„ENTER Command
When writing parameters to the Inverter from the PLC using RS-422A/485 communications, the parameters
are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the Inverter. To enable these parameters in the parameter
data area, use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No. Contents
0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM
0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.

The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100,000. Do not frequently
execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
INFO will become invalid (Error code: 02H).

6-62
 Individual Functions

„Error Codes
The following table shows RS-422A/485 communications error codes.
Error Code Contents
Function code error
01H
A function code other than 03H, 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
02H • The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
03H • The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parame-
21H
ters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters to the inverter during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation.
22H
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03 or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
23H • Writing parameters to the inverter during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing
24H
Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Inverter.

„Slave Not Responding

In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.

Application Precautions

If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not
return response messages to the master.

INFO

6-63
 „Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface cir-
cuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communica-
tions parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter and checks if
communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H1-05
(Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.

Fig 6.41 Details of Communications Terminals

During normal operation, the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value.
If an error occurs, a CE (RS-422A/485 communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact output will be turned ON and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.

6-64
 Individual Functions

‹ Using PI Control
PI control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combin-
ing proportional control (P) and integral control (I), you can even control targets (machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below.

P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value.

„PI Control Operation

To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I, the variation in the amount of opera-
tion (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between
the target value and feedback value) is fixed.

Deviation

Time

P I con trol
Amount of operation I control

P control

Time

Fig 6.42 PI Control Operation

„PI Control Applications

The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter.
Applica- Example of
Control Details
tion Sensor Used
• Feeds back machinery speed information and matches speed to the target value.
Speed Con- Tachometer genera-
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value and performs
trol tor
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Pressure
Feeds back pressure information and performs parameter pressure control. Pressure sensor
Control
Flow Rate
Feeds back flow rate information and controls the flow rate highly accurately. Flow rate sensor
Control
Tempera-
Feeds back temperature information and performs temperature adjustment control by • Thermocouple
ture Con-
rotating the fan. • Thermistor
trol

6-65
 „Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

PI control mode selection

0: Disabled
b5-01 0 or 1 0 No A
1: Enabled
PI Mode

Proportional gain (P) 0.00

Sets P-control proportional.
b5-02 to 1.00 Yes A
PI Gain P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
25.00
Integral (I) time Sets I-control integral time. 0.0 to
b5-03 1.0 s Yes A
PI I Time I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0. 360.0
Integral (I) limit Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum 0.0 to
b5-04 100.0% Yes A
PI I Limit output frequency. 100.0
PI limit Sets the limit after PI-control as a percentage of the maxi- 0.0 to
b5-06 100.0% Yes A
PI Limit mum output frequency. 100.0
PI offset adjustment -100.0
Sets the offset after PI-control as a percentage of the maxi-
b5-07 to 0.0% Yes A
PI Offset mum outut frequency.
+100.0
PI primary delay time parame-
Sets the time parameter for low pass filter for PI-control
ter 0.00 to
b5-08 outputs. 0.00 s Yes A
10.00
PI Delay Time Not usually necessary to set.

Selection of PI feedback com- 0: No detection of loss of PI feedback

mand loss detection 1: Detection of loss of PI feedback. Operation continues
during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not
b5-12 0 to 2 0 No A
operating.
2: Detection of loss of PI feedback. Coasts to stop during
Fb loss Det Sel detection and fault contact oprates.

PI feedback command loss

detection level Set the PI feedback loss detection level as a percent, with
b5-13 0 to 100 0% No A
the maximum output frequency at 100%.
Fb loss Det Lvl

PI feedback command loss

detection time 0.0 to
b5-14 Sets the PI feedback loss detection level in s units. 1.0 s No A
25.5
Fb loss Det Time
PI sleep function operation
level 0.0 to
b5-15 Set the PI sleep function start level as a frequency. 0.0 Hz No A
120.0
PI Sleep Level
PI sleep operation delay time 0.0 to
b5-16 Set the delay time until the PI sleep function starts. 0.0 s No A
PI Sleep Time 25.5
Accel/decel time for PI refer-
ence 0.0 to
b5-17 Set the accel/decel time for PI reference. 0.0 s No A
25.5
PI Acc/Dec Time
Pulse train input function
0: Frequency reference
selection
H6-01 1: PI feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A
Pulse Input Sel 2: PI target value

Param- Name
Output Signal Level During Min. Access
eter Description
LCD Display Multi-Function Analog Output Unit Level
Number
PI feedback value Monitors the feedback value when PI control is
used. 10 V: Max. frequency (0 to + 10 V
U1-24 0.01 A
PI Feedback The input for the max. frequency corresponds to possible)
100%.
PI input volume PI feedback volume 10 V: Max. frequency (0 to + 10 V
U1-36 0.01% A
PI Input Given as maximum frequency/100% possible)
PI output volume PI control output 10 V: Max. frequency (0 to + 10 V
U1-37 0.01% A
PI Output Given as maximum frequency/100% possible)
PI command PI command + PI command bias
U1-38 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01% A
PI Setpoint Given as maximum frequency/100%

6-66
 Individual Functions

Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set
Function
Value

19 PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)

Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)

Set
Function
Value

B PI feedback Max. output frequency

„PI Control Methods

The PI control method can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter b5-01.
Set Value Control Method
0 PI disabled
1 PI output becomes the Inverter output frequency.

PI Feedback Input Methods

The multifunction analog input A2 can be used for PI control feedback input.
Therefore the parameter H3-09 (Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) has to be set to B (PI-
feedback).
The PI feedback value can be adjusted by using the analog input terminal gain and bias.

„PI Adjustment Examples

Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P) and increase integral time (I).

Response Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

6-67
 Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To raPIly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I).

Response
Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration

If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to sup-
press the vibration.

Response Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration

If vibration occures, reduce the proportional gain (P) or increase the PI primary delay time parameter.

Response Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

„Setting Precautions
• In PI control, the b5-04 parameter is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed and the machine may be dam-
aged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 parameter is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PI control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 parameter is used to adjust PI control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.

6-68
 Individual Functions

• Set the low pass filter time parameter for the PI control output in b5-08. Enable this parameter to prevent
machinery resonance when machinery adhesive abrasion is great or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the
parameter to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time parameter to reduce Inverter
responsiveness.
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in parameter b5-17, you can
increase or decrease the PI target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/decele-
ration function (parameter C1) that is normally used, however, is allocated after PI control, so depending
on the settings, resonance with PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens, reduce
parameter C1 until hunting does not occur and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-17.
Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multi-func-
tion input set value 34 (PI soft starter).

6-69
6-70
Option Card
Frequency reference
using multi-step command
„PI Control Block

Serial Com
Frequency Upper limit
reference (U1-01) Fmax x 109%
Terminal A1
Output frequency

Multi-function input PI control

cancel signal is ON. PI is OFF under
P I S FS C ancel the following conditions:
b5-01=0
During JOG command input

PI command
(U1-38)
PI output monitor

Fig 6.43 PI Control Block

(U1-37)
Frequency reference
The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter.

terminal A2 PI feedback

PI input volume
(U1-36)
PI Limit PI primary delay
time parameter
b5-08

I-time I-time limit PI limit

b5-03 b5-06

Proportional
gain
b5-02 PI offset
(b5-07)
 Individual Functions

„PI Feedback Loss Detection

When performing PI control, be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function. If PI feedback is lost, the
Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PI feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and
continues for the time set in b5-14, a FbL (PI feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, a FbL (PI feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Opera-
tor, the error contact will operate and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PI feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.

PI feedback value

Loss detection
level
(b5-13)

Time
No Fbl
detection
Fbl detection

Loss detection time Loss detection time’

(b5-14) (b5-14)

Fig 6.44 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart

„PI Sleep
The PI sleep function stops the Inverter when the PI target value falls below the sleep operation level (b5-15)
for the sleep operation time set in parameter b5-16 or longer. The inverter operation will resume, if the PI tar-
get value exceeds the sleep operation level for the time set in parameter b5-16 or longer.
When PI control is disabled, the PI sleep function is also disabled. When using the PI sleep function, select
decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PI sleep time chart is shown below.

PI target value
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation Sleep operation
delay time delay time

Internal run command

Operation Stopped
Run command has been input
External run command
Operation status output
Operating

Fig 6.45 PI Sleep Time Chart

6-71
 ‹ Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1.

„Related parameters
param- Name Change
Setting Factory During Access
eter Details
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number tion
Energy-saving mode selec-
tion Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
b8-01 0: Disable 0 or 1 0 No A
Energy Save Sel 1: Enable

Energy-saving coefficient Set the maximum motor efficiency value. 0.0 to

b8-04 Set the motor rated capacity in E2-11 and adjust the value by *2 No A
5% at a time until output power reaches a minimum value. 655.00*1
Energy Save COEF

Power detection filter time

parameter
b8-05 Set the time parameter for output power detection. 0 to 2000 20 ms No A
kW Filter Time

Search operation voltage Set the limit value of the voltage control range during search
limiter operation.
b8-06
Perform search operation to optimize operations using minute 0 to 100 0% No A
variations in voltage using energy-saving control. Set to 0 to
Search V Limit
disable the search operation. 100% is the motor base voltage.

* 1. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters.
* 2. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.

„Adjusting Energy-saving Control

By the Energy Saving function the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output
voltage reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor
capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Out-
put). Also, adjust b8-04 in steps of 5 until reaches it’s minimum. The larger the energy-saving coefficient,
the greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time parameter b8-05. If
b8-05 is set too small. However, motor rotations, when the load is light, may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation is
used by varieting voltage. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that
control the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V and
for 400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.

6-72
 Individual Functions

‹ Setting Motor parameters

Normally the motor parameters are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not complete nor-
mally, set them manually.

„Related parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion

Motor rated current Sets the motor rated current.

0.32 to
These set values will become the reference values for 1.90 A
E2-01 6.40 No Q
motor protection, torque limits and torque control. *1
*2
Motor Rated FLA This parameter is an input data for autotuning.

Motor line-to-line resistance 0.000

9.842 Ω
E2-05 Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance. to No A
Term Resistance *1
65.000

Note The factory-set parameters are for a OMRON standard 4-pole motor.
* 1. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).

„Manual Motor Parameter Setting Methods

The motor parameters settings methods are given below. To enter settings refer to the motor test report.

Motor Rated Voltage Setting

Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.

Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting

E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot per-
form tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula and then make the setting
accordingly.
• E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (W) at 75°C of test report] x 0.92 (W)
• B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (W) at 75°C of test repor]t x 0.92 (W)
• F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (W) at 115°C of test report] x 0.87 (W)

6-73
 ‹ Setting the V/f Pattern
Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as the need arises.

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Input voltage setting 155 to
Set the Inverter input voltage. This setting is used as a ref- 200 V
E1-01 255 No Q
Input Voltage erence value in protection functions. *1
*1

V/f pattern selection 0 to D: Select from the 14 preset V/f patterns.

E1-03 F: Custom user-set patterns (Application for settings 0 to F F No Q
V/f Selection E1-04 to E1-10.)
Max. output frequency
(FMAX) 0.0 to
E1-04 50.0 Hz No Q
120.0
Max Frequency
Output voltage (V)
Max. voltage (VMAX) 0.0 to
200.0 V
E1-05 255.0 No Q
*1
Max voltage *1

Base frequency (FA) 0.0 to

E1-06 50.0 Hz No Q
Base frequency 120.0
Mid. output frequency 0.0 to
E1-07 255.0 2.5 Hz No A
Mid Frequency A *1
Mid. output frequency
Frequency (Hz) 0.0 to 15.0 V
E1-08 voltage No A
120.0 *1
Mid Voltage A
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same
Min. output frequency values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for
(FMIN) E1-08 will be disregarded. 0.0 to
E1-09 1.2 Hz No Q
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the fol- 120.0
Min Frequency
lowing manner:
Min. output frequency E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) 0.0 to
voltage >E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN) 9.0 V
E1-10 255.0 No A
*1
Min Voltage *1
Mid. output frequency 2 0.0 to 0.0 Hz
E1-11 No A
Mid Frequency B 120.0 *2
Mid. output frequency 0.0 to
voltage 2 0.0 V
E1-12 Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, 255.0 No A
*2
Mid Voltage B this setting is not required. *1

Base voltage 0.0 to

0.0 V
E1-13 255.0 No A
Base Voltage *2
*1

* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.

„Setting Inverter Input Voltage

Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the
standard value for the protection function and similar functions (overvoltage level, stall trip).

„Setting V/f Pattern

Set the V/f pattern in E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern: Select one of the 14 pattern
types (set value: 0 to D) that have been set beforehand or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is
set to 0.

6-74
 Individual Functions

To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.

Set
Characteristic Application Specifications
Value
0 (F) 50 Hz specifications

This pattern is used in general applications. 1 60 Hz specifications

Parameter Torque Used when the load torque is fixed, regard- 60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
Characteristic less of rotation speed, for linear transport 2
50 Hz
systems.
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
3
60 Hz
4 50 Hz specifications,× 3 decrement

Variable torque
This pattern is used for loads with torque 5 50 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
proportional to two or three times the rota-
characteristic 6 60 Hz specifications, × 3 decrement
tion speed, such as fans and pumps.
7 60 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern 50 Hz specifications, medium startup
8
only in the following cases. torque
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
High Startup motor is large (approx. 150 m min.) 9 50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
Torque (See • A large torque is required at startup (ele-
vator loads, etc.) 60 Hz specifications, medium startup
Note)* • An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter A
torque
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
than optimum.
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
C
Fixed Output This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 60 Hz
Operation Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied. 120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
D
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.

When you select these patterns, the values of parameters E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 160 kW V/f pattern

The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.

6-75
 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Parameter Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

1.3 2.5
1.5 3 1.5 3
1.5

• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5

• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

1.3 2.5 1.3 2.5 1.5 1.5

• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to D)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz

1.5 1.5

6-76
 Individual Functions

2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Parameter Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to D)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz

6-77
 55 to 160 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Parameter Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to D)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz

6-78
 Individual Functions

When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set parameters E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only refer to parameters E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
INFO

Output voltage (V)

Frequency (Hz)

Fig 6.46 User-Set V/f Pattern

„Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that con-
trol method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

6-79
 Digital Operator Functions

‹ Setting Digital Operator Functions

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Monitor selection after Set the monitor item to be displayed when the power sup-
power up ply is turned ON.
1: Frequency reference
o1-02 1 to 4 1 Yes A
2: Output frequency
Power-ON Monitor 3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01

Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the fre-
quency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
Frequency units of refer- 1: 0.01% (Maximum output frequency is
ence setting and monitor 100%)
2 to 39: rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor
poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and dis-
play for the max. output frequency.
0 to
o1-03 0 No A
39999

Set digit number

excluding the decimal
point.
Display Scaling
Set the number of
digits below the
decimal point to
display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0,
set 12000.

LOCAL/REMOTE key Set the run method selection key (LOCAL/REMOTE Key)
enable/disable function.
o2-01 0: Disabled 0 or 1 1 No A
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and
Local/Remote Key
the parameter settings.)
STOP Key during con-
trol circuit terminal oper- Set the STOP Key in the run mode.
ation 0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an
o2-02 0 or 1 1 No A
external terminal, the Stop Key is disabled.)
Oper STOP Key 1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)

User parameter initial Clears or stores user initial values.

value 0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set parameters as user
o2-03 initial values.) 0 to 2 0 No A
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
User Defaults When the set parameters are recorded as user initial val-
ues, 1110 will be set in A1-03.

Frequency reference When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Opera-
setting method selection tor frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter
Key is necessary.
o2-05 0: Enter Key needed 0 or 1 0 No A
1: Enter Key not needed
Operator M.O.P. When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
Cumulative operation
time setting Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units. 0 to
o2-07 0 No A
Operation time is calculated from the set values. 65535
Elapsed Time Set
Fan operation time set- Set the initial value of the fan operation time using hour
ting 0 to
o2-10 units. 0 No A
65535
Fan ON Time Set The operation time accumulates from the set value.

6-80
 Digital Operator Functions

„Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units

Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. You can change the
units for the following parameters using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17 (Frequency references)

„Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON

Using parameter o1-02 selects the monitor item (U1- ††
[status monitor]) that is to be displayed on the Digi-
tal Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1- in ††
Chapter 5 Parameters.

Setting Precautions

If selecting monitor parameters other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency) and U1-
03 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01 (monitor selection) and then set
o1-02 to 4.
INFO

„Disabling the STOP Key

If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2 or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.

„Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. If the key is disabled, you cannot
use it to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN-command source.

„Initializing Changed Parameter Values

You can save to the Inverter parameter set values that you have changed as parameter initial values. Change
the set values from the Inverter factory settings and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory.
To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.

„Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you
can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter
key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference and then continuously press the UP key to incre-
ment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s there-
after. Press and hold down the UP key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s after
that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN keys are
released.

6-81
 „Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in parameter o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(inverter Operating Time).

„Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time

Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in parameter o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).

‹ Copying Parameters
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile
memory).
• Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters (VERIFY)

„Related Parameters
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Copy function selection 0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
o3-01 0 to 3 0 No A
Copy Func Select 2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Read permitted selec-
tion 0: Read prohibited
o3-02 0 or 1 0 No A
1: Read permitted
Copy Allowable

6-82
 Digital Operator Functions

„Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)

To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.

Table 6.2 READ Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.

Press the MENU key and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.

Press the ENTER key and select the parameters

2
monitor display.

Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment key and Decrement key.

Press the ENTER key and select the parameters

4
setting display.

Change the set value to 1 using the Increment

5
key.

Set the changed data using the ENTER key. The

6
READ function will start.

If the READ function ends normally, End is

displayed on the Digital Operator. Parameter
7
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the
display returns to o3-01.

If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays
and their descriptions are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Func-
tion.)
Error Display Description

You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.

Read data length mismatch or read data error.

Unable to write parameters to EEPROM on the Digital Operator.

Select READ Permitted

Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you
set o3-01 to 1 and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the write
operation will be stopped.

6-83
 „Writing parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the follow-
ing method.

Table 6.3 COPY Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.

Press the MENU key and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.

Press the ENTER key and select the parameters

2
monitor display.

Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment key and Decrement key.

Press the ENTER key and select the parameters

4
setting display.

Change the set value to 2 using the Increment

5
Key.

Set the changed data using the ENTER key. The

6
COPY function will start.

If the COPY function ends normally, End is dis-

played on the Digital Operator. Parameter o3-
7
01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the dis-
play returns to o3-01.

If an error is displayed, set the parameters again. Error displays and their descriptions are shown below. (Refer
to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Description

Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.

Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy and the Inverter control method stored in
the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the parameter written to the Inverter and the parameter in the Digital Operator
are different.
After copying has ended, the checksum between the sum value of the Inverter parameter and the sum
value of the Digital Operator parameter are different.

6-84
 Digital Operator Functions

„Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, make the settings using the follow-
ing method.

Table 6.4 VERIFY Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.

Press the MENU key. and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.

Press the ENTER key and select the parameters

2
monitor display.

Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment key and Decrement key.

Press the ENTER key and select the function

4
setting display.

Change the set value to 3 using the Increment

5
key.

Set the changed data using the ENTER key. The

6
VERIFY function will start.

If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is

displayed on the Digital Operator. Parameter
7
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the
display returns to o3-01.

If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays
and their descriptions are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Func-
tion.)
Error Display Description

Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).

„Application Precautions

When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
INFO • Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Control method

6-85
 ‹ Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 parameter groups and refer to drive mode, using
the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function
selection) to 1B (write parameters permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operator when the ter-
minal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency ref-
erence is prohibited. You can, however, reference parameters.

Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD DIsplay Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)
Parameter access level
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting
A1-01 and A1-04.)
A1-01 2: ADVANCED 0 or 2 2 Yes A
Acces Level (Parameters can be read and set in both quick pro-
gramming mode and advanced programming (A)
mode.)

‹ Setting a Password
When a pasword is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you can not refer or
change the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all parameters except A1-00 by using the password function in
combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).

„Related Parameters

„
Name Change
Param-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Description
LCD Display Range Setting Opera- Level
Number
tion
Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)
Parameter access level 0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting
A1-01 and A1-04.)
A1-01 2: ADVANCED 0 or 2 2 Yes A
(Parameters can be read and set in both quick pro-
Acces Level gramming mode and advanced programming (A)
mode.)

Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.

Password This function write-protects some parameters of the initial-
ize mode. 0 to
A1-04 0 No A
If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 parameters 9999
Enter Password can no longer be changed. (Programming mode parame-
ters can be changed.)

Password setting Used to set a four digit number as the password.

This parameter is not usually displayed. When the pass-
A1-05 0 to 9999 0 No A
word (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the reset key and
Select password press the Menu key and the password will be displayed.

6-86
 7
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor prob-
lems and countermeasures.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2

Troubleshooting .........................................................7-12
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection and autotuning error detection.

‹ Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing
the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults and the selected stopping
method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the error reset signal.
• Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing

Display Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insu-
lation or a damaged cable.)
Overcurrent
• The load is too large or the accelera- Reset the fault after correcting its
The Inverter output current exceeded
tion/deceleration time is too short. cause.
the overcurrent detection level.
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output.

Ground Fault
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
The ground fault current at the
output. (A ground fault can be caused Reset the fault after correcting its
Inverter output exceeded approxi-
by motor burn damage, worn insula- cause.
mately 50% of the Inverter rated out-
tion or a damaged cable.)
put current.

The output transistor has failed

because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit
Fuse Blown between the following terminals. A Replace the Inverter after correct-
The fuse in the main circuit is blown. short-circuit will damage the output ing the cause.
transistor:
U, V, W
, ← →U, V, W

Main Circuit Overvoltage The deceleration time is too short and Increase the deceleration time or
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the regenerative energy from the connect a Braking Resistor Unit
the overvoltage detection level. motor is too large. and Braking Unit.
200 V class: Approx. 410 V Decrease the voltage so it's within
400 V class: Approx. 820 V The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.

7-2
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

Display Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
• An open-phase occurred with the
the Undervoltage Detection Level
input power supply.
(L2-05).
• A momentary power loss occurred.
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
• The wiring terminals for the input
400 V class: Approx. 380 V Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
The MC stopped responding during
power supply are too large.
Inverter operation.
• A fault occurred in the surge pre-
Applicable Inverter Capacities
vention circuit.
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW

• Try turning the power supply

Control Power Fault
off and on.
The control power supply voltage ---
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
dropped.
continues to occur.

Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault

Overheating occurred in the inrush
resistor.
• Try turning the power supply
The MC did not respond for 10 s even • The MC in the main circuit failed.
off and on.
though the MC ON signal has been • The MC excitation coil is burned
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
output. out.
continues to occur.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW

• An open-phase occurred in the input

power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
• The wiring terminals for the input
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
unusually (not when regenerating). cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases
is bad.

• There is a broken wire in the output

cable.
Reset the fault after correcting its
Output Open-phase • There is a broken wire in the motor-
cause.
An open-phase occurred at the winding.
Inverter output. • The output terminals are loose.

The motor being used has a capacity

Check the motor and Inverter
less than 5% of the Inverter's maxi-
capacity.
mum motor capacity.

Cooling Fin Overheating The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
ing fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source.
or 105°C.
OH: The temperature exceeded the
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can
( ) be changed by L8-03.). The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
OH1: The temperature exceeded Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
100°C (Stopping method: Coast to our sales representative.)
stop).

Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.

7-3
 Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceler-
Motor Overheating Alarm ation and cycle times.
The Inverter will stop or will continue
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of Check the V/f characteristics.
L1-03.
Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A1 and A2.

Check the size of the load and the

length of the acceleration, deceler-
Motor Overheating Fault ation and cycle times.
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
setting of L1-04.
Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A1 and A2.

The load is too heavy. The accelera- Check the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time and cycle length of the acceleration, deceler-
Motor Overload time are too short. ation and cycle times.
The motor overload protection func-
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal Check the V/f characteristics.
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is Check the Motor Rated Current
incorrect. (E2-01).

The load is too heavy. The accelera- Check the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time and cycle length of the acceleration, deceler-
Inverter Overload time are too short. ation and cycle times.
The Inverter overload protection func-
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal Check the V/f characteristics.
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
Replace the Inverter with one that
The Inverter capacity is too low.
has a larger capacity.

• Make sure that the settings in

Overtorque Detected 1 L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
There has been a current greater than ate.
-
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
setting in L6-03. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.

• Make sure the load is an inertial

High-slip Braking OL load.
The inertia returned to the load is too
The output frequency did not change • Set the system so that the decel-
large.
for longer than the time set in N3-04. eration time that does not pro-
duce 0 V is 120 s or less.

• Make sure that the settings in

Undertorque Detected 1 L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
There has been a current less than the ate.
-
setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
setting in L6-03. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.

7-4
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

Display Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions
PI Feedback Reference Lost
A PI feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PI feed-
back input was less than b5-13 (PI - -
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PI
feedback loss detection time).

Check the Communications

External fault input from Communi-
- Option Card and communications
cations Option Card
signals.

External fault (Input terminal 3)

External fault (Input terminal 4)

• Reset external fault inputs to the
An "external fault" was input from a
multi-function inputs.
External fault (Input terminal 5) multi-function input terminal (S3 to
• Remove the cause of the exter-
S7).
nal fault.
External fault (Input terminal 6)

External fault (Input terminal 7)

Digital Operator Connection Fault

The connection to the Digital Operator
Check the connection to the Digi-
was broken during operation for a -
tal Operator.
RUN command from the Digital
Operator.

RS-422A/485 Communications
Check the communications
Error
devices and communications sig-
A normal reception was not possible -
nals.
for 2 s or longer after control data was
received once.

Option Communications Error

Check the communications
A communications error was detected
devices and communications sig-
during a run command or while setting -
nals.
a frequency reference from a Commu-
nications Option Card.

Digital Operator Communications The Digital Operator's connector isn't Disconnect the Digital Operator
Error 1 connected properly. and then connect it again.
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5 The Inverter's control circuits are
seconds after the power was turned Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
on.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU External RAM Fault and on again.

The control circuits were destroyed. Replace the Inverter.

Digital Operator Communications The Digital Operator isn't connected Disconnect the Digital Operator
Error 2 properly. and then connect it again.
After communications were estab-
lished, there was a communications The Inverter's control circuits are
error with the Digital Operator for Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
more than 2 seconds.

7-5
 Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off
-
Baseblock circuit error and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
EEPROM error and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU internal A/D converter error and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU internal A/D converter error and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

The Option Card is not connected Turn off the power and insert the
properly. Card again.
Option Card connection error
Replace the Option Card or the
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
ASIC internal RAM fault and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
Watchdog timer fault and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault and on again.

The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

ASIC version fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.

The Option Card is not connected Turn off the power and insert the
Communications Option Card A/D properly. Card again.
converter error The Option Card's A/D converter is Replace the Communications
faulty. Option Card.

Communications Option Card self

diagnostic error

Communications Option Card

Communications Option Card fault. Replace the Option Card.
model code error

Communications Option Card

DPRAM error

7-6
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

‹ Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that does not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.

Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
Check the sequence of the forward and
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
reverse run commands.
Input Together
Since the rotational direction is
(blink- Both the forward and reverse run com- -
unknown, the motor will be deceler-
ing) mands have been ON for more than
ated to a stop when this minor fault
0.5 s.
occurs.

Main Circuit Undervoltage

The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was
below the Undervoltage Detection See causes for UV1, UV2 and UV3 See corrective actions for UV1, UV2
(blink- Level Setting (L2-05). faults in the previous table. and UV3 faults in the previous table.
ing) • The surge current limiting contactor
opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.

Main Circuit Overvoltage

The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
Decrease the voltage so it's within
(blink- the overvoltage detection level. The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
ing) 200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V

The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.

Cooling Fin Overheating
There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source
(blink- The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
ing) ing fin exceeded the setting in L8-02. Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
OMRON representative.)

Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm

An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter over-
Clear the multi-function input termi-
(blink- heating alarm signal) was input from a -
nal's overheating alarm input.
ing) multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).

Check the size of the load and the

length of the acceleration, deceleration
Motor overheating and cycle times.
E was set for H3-09 and the motor
(blink- The motor has overheated.
temperature thermistor input exceeded Check the V/f characteristics.
ing) the alarm detection level.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminals A1 and A2.

Overtorque 1 • Make sure that the settings in L6-02

There has been a current greater than and L6-03 are appropriate.
(blink- -
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system and
ing) setting in L6-03. correct the cause of the overtorque.

7-7
 Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
External error detected for Com-
munications Card other than SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified - Remove the cause of the external fault.
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3) and an external
fault was input from the Option Card.

(blink- External fault (Input terminal S3)

ing)

(blink- External fault (Input terminal S4)

ing)
• Reset external fault inputs to the
An external fault was input from a
multi-function inputs.
(blink- External fault (Input terminal S5) multi-function input terminal (S3 to
• Remove the cause of the external
ing) S7).
fault.

(blink- External fault (Input terminal S6)

ing)

(blink- External fault (Input terminal S7)

ing)

PI Feedback Reference Lost

A PI feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PI feed-
(blink- back input was less than b5-13 (PI - -
ing) feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PI
feedback loss detection time).

RS-422A/485 Communications
Error
Check the communication devices and
(blink- Normal reception was not possible for -
signals.
ing) 2 s or longer after received control
data.

Option Card Communication Error

A communication error occurred in a
Check the communication devices and
(blink- mode where the run command or a -
signals.
ing) frequency reference is set from a
Communications Option Card.

Communications on Standby
Check the communication devices and
(blink- Control data was not normally -
signals.
ing) received when power was turned ON.

7-8
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

‹ Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings. It
will not be possible to start the Inverter until the parameters have been set correctly. (The alarm output and
fault contact outputs will not operate.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.

Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings

Display Meaning Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your OMRON repre-
capacity setting sentative.)

Parameter setting range

The Parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range.
error

One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
05) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
Multi-function input
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set fre-
selection error
quency) were selected at the same time.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the
same time.

Option Card selection The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
error 3, but an Option Card is not mounted or connected (C option).

Multi-function analog
• H3-09 = B
input selection error

The following settings have been made at the same time.

PI control selection • b5-01 (PI Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
error • b5-15 (PI Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.

Parameters E1-04, E1-06, E1-07 and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
V/f data setting error
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

One of the following Parameter setting errors exists.

• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
Parameter setting error
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.

A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.

EEPROM write error • Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the Parameters again.

7-9
 ‹ Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, an error
code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.

Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning. • Check the input data.
Motor data error There is an error in the relationship • Check the capacity of the Inverter and
between the motor output and the motor motor.
rated current.

A minor fault occurred during autotun-

Alarm • Check the input data.
ing .
• Check wiring and the machine.
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel • Check the load.
STOP key input
autotuning.

Autotuning was not completed in the • Check the input data.

Line-to-line resis- specified time. • Check motor wiring.
tance error The results of autotuning has exceeded • If the motor is connected to the
the setting range for a user Parameter. machine, disconnect it.

The current flow exceeded the motor

rated current.
Check the current detection circuit,
Current detection
The detected current sign was the oppo- motor wiring, current detector and
error
site of what it should be. installation methods.

There is a phase fault for U, V or W.

The torque reference exceeded 100%

V/f settings exces- • Check and correct the settings.
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
sive* • Disconnect the load from the motor.
during autotuning.

Rated current setting Check the input data (particularly the

The rated current is set high. motor output current and motor rated
alarm* current).

* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.

7-10
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

‹ Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function

The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and o3-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not function.

Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function

Func-
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
tion
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a Parameter
Digital Operator Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing
when the Digital Operator was write-
write-protected Parameters with the Digital Operator.
protected (o3-02 = 0).

The read data length does not agree. Repeat the read.
Illegal read data Check the Digital Operator cable.
Read The write data is incorrect. Replace the Digital Operator.

A low Inverter voltage has been

An attempted write of a Parameter to detected.
Illegal write status
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.

The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
ID not matched
number is different. product code and software number.

The capacity of the Inverter being

Inverter capacity Use the copy function for the same
copied and the capacity in the Digital
matched Inverter capacity.
Operator are different.

The parameter written to the Inverter

Copy was compared with the parameter in
Verify error Retry the copy.
the Digital Operator and they were
different.

The checksum in the Inverter parame-

ter area was compared with the check-
Checksum error Retry the copy.
sum in the Digital Operator parameter
area and they were different.

7-11
 Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and apply the appro-
priate measures.

If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.

‹ If Parameters Cannot Be Set

Use the following information if an Inverter parameter cannot be set.

„The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.

The Inverter is operating (drive mode).

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the set-
tings.

Parameter write enable is input.

This occurs when "parameter write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set
the parameters.

Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)

If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the parameters for
the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and
the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password
in parameter A1-04.)

„OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.

The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.

„CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.

This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.

7-12
 Troubleshooting

‹ If the Motor Does Not Operate

„The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.

If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to
make the DRIVE indicator flash and enter the drive mode by pressing the ENTER key. The DRIVE indica-
tor will light when drive mode is entered.

IMPORTANT

The operation method setting is wrong.

If parameter b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not oper-
ate when the Run key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE key to switch to Digital Operator opera-
tion or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).

The LOCAL/REMOTE key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 0. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.

INFO

The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.

„The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.

The Inverter is not in drive mode.

If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Pressing the MENU key
makes the DRIVE indicator flash and enter the drive mode by pressing the ENTER key. The DRIVE indicator
will light when drive mode is entered.

7-13
 The operation method selection is wrong.
If parameter b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an
external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE key again to return to the original setting.

The LOCAL/REMOTE key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 0. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.

INFO

A 3-wire sequence is in effect.

The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2-
wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable
for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to
S7) to a value other than 0.

The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.

There is a multi-function analog input setting error.

If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain) and if no voltage (current) is input, then the
frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.

„The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func-
tion, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

‹ If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed

If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V) and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V) and T3(W), the motor operates in a for-
ward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer
and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V and W.

7-14
 Troubleshooting

‹ If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow

„The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

„The stall prevention level during running is too low.

If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before out-
putting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

‹ If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference

Use the following information if the motor operates on a higher level than the reference.

„The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.

„A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.

When 1F (frequency reference) is set for parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Func-
tion Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency
reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.

‹ If Motor Deceleration is Slow

Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.

„The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor unit and braking unit is con-
nected.
The following causes are possible.

"Stall prevention during deceleration enabled" is set.

When Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection
during Deceleration) to 0 (disabled). When this parameter is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking
resistor unit and the braking unit do not fully function.

The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02 and C1-04).

Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider
increasing the motor capacity.

7-15
 „If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration
is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output ter-
minals (M1 and M2) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0 to
5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz) . Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run
signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.

‹ If the Motor Overheats

„The load is too big.

If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the accel-
eration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

„The ambient temperature is too high.

The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating
temperature range.

„The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.

When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and
the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special
motor for Inverters.

‹ If peripheral devices like PLC’s or other are influenced by the starting or

running inverter
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.

7-16
 Troubleshooting

‹ If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run

The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more) or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Invert-
ers). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the
carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.

‹ If There is Mechanical Oscillation

„The machinery is making unusual sounds.

The following causes are possible.

There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters
C6-02 to C6-05.

There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output fre-
quency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.

„Oscillation and hunting are occurring.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-
02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time parameter) and N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain) in order.
Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.

„Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control.

If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I
parameters. (Refer to page 6-196)

‹ If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped

If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the
motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping and after a deceleration stop has been
executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking
as follows:
• Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.

7-17
 ‹ If OV is Detected When a Fan is Started or Fan Stalls
Generation of OV (Over Voltage) and stalling can occur if a fan is turning when it is started. The DC injection
braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the
parameter b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.

‹ If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference

„The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.

When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (parameters d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width
(parameter d3-04) settings are suitable.

„The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.

The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.

7-18
 8
Chapter 8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter

Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2

 Maintenance and Inspection

‹ Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.

‹ Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front
cover have all turned OFF and then wait until at least five minutes have elapsed before beginning the inspec-
tion. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric
shock.

Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections

Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
External terminals, Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
mounting bolts, connec-
tors, etc. Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.

Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty? dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
PCBs
the PCBs? (4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
Cooling fan has the total operating time exceeded Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
Power elements dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
the elements?
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
Smoothing capacitor Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
coloration or odor?

8-2
 Maintenance and Inspection

‹ Periodic Maintenance of Parts

The Inverter is configured of many parts and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use
of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi-
tions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.

Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines

Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
Smoothing capacitor 5 years
inspection.)
Breaker relays - Determine need by inspection.
Fuses 10 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day

8-3
 ‹ Cooling Fan Replacement Outline

„200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.

Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.

A ir flo w d ire ction

2
1
F an co ve r

Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)

Mounting the Cooling Fan

1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above
faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter.

8-4
 Maintenance and Inspection

„200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More

A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.

Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the con-
troller.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connectors (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.

Mounting the Cooling Fan

After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter.

Air flow direction

Fan cover
Controller bracket

Controller
Connector

Gate driver

Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)

8-5
 ‹ Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.

Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
card.

IMPORTANT

„Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card

1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.

„Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card

Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on
the card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.

Removing and Mounting the

Control Circuit Terminal Card

1
1
1

2
2 1

Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card

8-6
 9
Chapter 9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.

Standard Inverter Specifications ...........................................9-2

Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ................9-6
 Standard Inverter Specifications

‹ Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.

„200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number 3G3PV- A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A2185 A2220 A2300 A2370 A2450 A2550 A2750 A2900
Max. applicable motor output
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
(kW)
Rated output capacity
1.2 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.7 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 44 55 69 82 110 130
Output ratings

(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 3.2 4.1 7.0 9.6 15 23 31 45 58 71 85 115 145 180 215 283 346
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230 or 240 VAC
Max. output voltage (V)
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency
120 Hz max.
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply characteristics

Rated frequency (Hz)

Allowable voltage fluctua-
+ 10%, - 15%
tion

Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics

DC reactor Optional Built in

Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
tification
Not possible Possible*2

Model Number 3G3PV- B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750 B2900 B211K
Max. applicable motor output
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
(kW)
Rated output capacity
32 44 55 69 82 110 130 160
Output ratings

(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415
3-phase 200, 208, 220, 230 or 240 VAC
Max. output voltage (V)
(Proportional to input voltage)
Max. output frequency
120 Hz max.
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply characteristics

Rated frequency (Hz)

Allowable voltage fluctua-
+ 10%, - 15%
tion

Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics

DC reactor Built in
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec- Possible*2
tification

* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole OMRON motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.

9-2
 Standard Inverter Specifications

„400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number 3G3PV- A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185
Max. applicable motor output
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
(kW)
Rated output capacity
1.4 1.6 2.8 4.0 5.8 6.6 9.5 13 18 24 30
Output ratings

(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 1.8 2.1 3.7 5.3 7.6 8.7 12.5 17 24 31 39
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency 120 Hz max.
(Hz)
Power supply characteristics

Rated voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency (Hz)

Allowable voltage fluctua-

+ 10%, - 15%
tion

Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics

DC reactor Optional
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
Not possible
tification

Model Number 3G3PV- A4220 A4300 A4370 A4450 A4550 A4750 A4900 A411K A413K A416K
Max. applicable motor output
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
(kW)
Rated output capacity
34 46 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230
Output ratings

(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency
120 Hz max.
(Hz)
Power supply characteristics

Max. voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency (Hz)

Allowable voltage fluctua-

+ 10%, - 15%
tion

Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics

DC reactor Built in
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
tification Possible*2

9-3
 Model Number 3G3PV- B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B4900 B411K B413K B416K
Max. applicable motor output
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
(kW)
Rated output capacity
34 46 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230
Output ratings

(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency
120 Hz max.
(Hz)
Power supply characteristics

Max. voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency (Hz)

Allowable voltage fluctua-

+ 10%, - 15%
tion

Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics

DC reactor Built in
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
tification Possible*2

* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole OMRON motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.

9-4
 Standard Inverter Specifications

‹ Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.

Table 9.3 Common Specifications

Model Number
Specification
3G3PV-
Sine wave PWM
Control method
V/f control
Speed control range 1:40
Speed control accuracy ±2 to 3% (25°C ± 10°C)
Frequency accuracy (tem- Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
perature characteristics) Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Control characteristics

Frequency setting resolu- Digital references: 0.01 Hz

tion Analog references: 0.05/50 Hz (10 bit no sign)
Overload capacity and
120% of rated output current per minute
maximum current*1
Frequency setting signal 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA
Acceleration/Decelera-
0.0 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
tion time
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, 4-speed control (maximum), acceleration/decelera-
tion time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning, cooling fan ON/OFF control, torque compensation, jump
Main control functions frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PI control
(with sleep function), energy-saving control, RS-422A/485 communications (19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset and function copy-
ing.
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown.
Overload protection 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
Overvoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
Protective functions

200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.

Undervoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss Stops for 15 ms or more.
ridethru By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration or running.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits. (50% of inverter rated current)
Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Protective structure
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Ambient operating tem- -10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
perature –10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
Ambient operating humid-
95% max. (with no condensation)
Environment

ity
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude 1000 m max.*2
Vibration 10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max

* 1. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
* 2. If applied in higher altitudes contact your OMRON representative.

9-5
 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the
application.

Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices

Purpose Name Model (Code) Descriptions
MCCB or Ground Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to pro-
Example: Mitsubishi Power supply
Protect Inverter wiring tect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable
Fault Interrupter* Electrics NV Series
for high frequencies.
Prevents burning when Example: Fuji Electrics Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out
Magnetic Contac-
a Braking Resistor is SC Series when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the MCCB or
tor
used. coil. ground fault
interrupter
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control
Contains switching
surge
Surge Absorber DCR2- † relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors
and relays near the Inverter.

Isolates I/O signals Isolator DGP † Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective
against inductive noise.
Magnetic
contactor

Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All AC reactor to
Improves the input
DC Reactor 3G3HV-PUZDAB † Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors. improve power
power factor of the
Inverter
AC Reactor 3G3IV-PUZBAB † These are optional for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Install
DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power
factor

supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).

Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power
3G3IV-PFN † supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter
Reduces the affects of
Input Noise Filter
3G3EV-PLNF † into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Zero phase
radio and control device Inverter as possible. reactor
noise Output Noise Fil-
ter 3G3IV-PLF † Reduces noise generated by the inverter. Connect as close
to the inverter as possible. Input-line
noise filter
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
Enables stopping the
Braking Resistor
Unit
3G3IV-PLKEB † reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
(Braking Unit is needed.)
machine in a set time
Braking Unit 3G3IV-PCDBR B † Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the decelera-
tion time of the motor.
DC
reactor

Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera- Inverter

Analog Operator
(small plastic 3G3IV-PJVOP95 † tion control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Operator) VS Operator
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera-
Operates the Inverter
Analog Operator
3G3IV-PJVOP96 † tion control to be performed by analog references from a Frequency
externally
(Standard steel-
plate Operator)
(73041-0906X- ) † remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz Ground
1 m cable:
Digital Operator (3G3IV-PCN126) Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely. Output-line
Connection Cable 3 m cable: Cable length: 1 m or 3 m noise filter
(3G3IV-PCN326-E)
A system controller that can be match to the automatic
Controls an Inverter
system
VS System Mod-
ule
JGSM- † control system to produce an optimum system configura-
tion.
Provides Inverter Momentary Power Handles momentary power losses for the control power
momentary power loss Loss Recovery 3G3IV-PCN 26 † supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
recovery time Unit 2 s). Motor
Sets/monitors frequen-
cies and voltages exter- Scaling Meter K3TJ-V11 † Measurs the output voltage externally and designed for
use with a PWM meter. Ground
nally.

* Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors
* The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)

9-6
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Options and Peripheral Devices

There are several types of options and peripheral devices for Inverters: Separately installed options, spe-
cial options, Option Cards, and recommended separately installed options. The specifications of these
options are provided in these sections.

Separately Installed Options Special Options

K3TJ-V11 † 3G3IV-PCDBR B † 3G3IV-PLKEB † 3G3HV-PUZDAB †

Scaling Meter Braking Resistor Unit DC Reactor
Braking Unit

3G3IV-PJVOP96 † 3G3IV-PJVOP95 † †
3G3FV-PCN 26(-E) Digital Operator
Analog Operator Analog Operator Digital Operator 3G3IV-PJVOP161 (LED)
(standard, steel panels) (small, plastic) Connection Cable 3G3IV-PJVOP160 (LCD)

Recommended Separately Installed

Options

Recommended Separately Installed

Options
3G3EV-PLNFD †
Simple Input Noise
Filter

3G3IV-PUZBAB †
AC Reactor 3G3IV-PLF †
Output Noise Filter

3G3IV-PFN †
Input Noise Filter

3-phase inductive

Power supply

3-phase, 200VAC (200-V Class) Option cards

3-phase, 400VAC (400-V Class)

3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN
DeviceNet Communications Card

Fig. 3.1 Options and Peripheral Devices

9-7
 Table 9.1 Options and Peripheral Devices
Type Name Model number Application
Replacement fan for Inverters equipped with a cooling fan.
Special Mounted
Options
Fan Unit 3G3IV-PFAN † Replace the Cooling Fan when the fan replacement time has come or a cooling fan fault
(FAN) alarm has been displayed.

Scaling Meter K3TJ-V11 † Connects to a multi-function analog output from the Inverter.
Used to display rotational speeds of motors, line speeds, etc., in physical units.
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by
Separately
Analog Operator (stan-
dard with steel panels)
3G3IV-PJVOP96 † analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Installed Options Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by
Analog Operator (small,
plastic)
3G3IV-PJVOP95 † analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Braking Unit 3G3IV-PCDBR B † Not required with Inverters of 7.5 kW or less for 200-V class Inverters or for Inverters of
15 kW or less for 400-V class Inverters.

Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV-PLKEB † Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use
rate: 10% ED).

DC Reactor 3G3HV-PUZDAB † Used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter and to improve the input power fac-
tor of the Inverter. All Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
Special Options Digital Operator with
3G3IV-PJVOP160 Displays messages on a LCD.
LCD Display
Digital Operator with
3G3IV-PJVOP161 Display messages on a LED display. Standard in Asia and Europe.
LED Display
Digital Operator Connec- 3G3IV-PCN126 (1 m) Extension cable to use a 3G3PV-series Digital Operator remotely.
tion Cable 3G3IV-PCN326-E (3 m) Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
Connection cable for connecting the 3G3PV series Inverter to the SYSDrive configura-
Personal Computer cable 3G3IV-PCN329-E
tor (software tool) on Personal Computer.
DeviceNet Communica- Used for DeviceNet communications with a Programmable Controller or other
Option cards 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN
tions Card DeviceNet master device.
Standard terminal card 3G3PV-PETC618140 Standard terminal card for standard operation
7HUPLQDO FDUGV Optional terminal card (with shunt connector CN15) for switching the analog output
Optional terminal card 3G3PV-PETC618120
levels between (0-10V) or (4 to 20 mA).

AC Reactor 3G3IV-PUZBAB † Used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity
is greatly larger than the Inverter’s capacity. Also used to increase the power factor.
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise
Simple Input Noise Filter 3G3EV-PLNFD † flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connected to the power supply
input side.
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise
Recommended
Input Noise Filter
(Schaffner)
3G3IV-PFN † flowing from the inverter into the power supply line.Connected to the power supply
Separately input side.
Installed Input Noise Filter
Options*1 (Schaffner) for EMC †
3G3RV-PFI -SE Required for the 3G3PV Inverter to meet the EMC Directive.
Directive
Input Noise Filter
(Rasmi) for EMC Direc- †
3G3RV-PFI -E Required for the 3G3PV Inverter to meet the EMC Directive.
tive
Output Noise Filter
(Tokin)
3G3IV-PLF † Controls noise generated by the Inverter so it does not enter the power supply. Con-
nected to the motor output side.

* 1. Recommended Options can be ordered from OMRON using the above model numbers.

9-8
 Options and Peripheral Devices

‹ Special Mounted Options

The special mounted options are described in this section.

„ Fan Unit
Replacement fan for Inverters equipped with a cooling fan.
Replace the Cooling Fan when the fan replacement time has come or a cooling fan fault (FAN) alarm has been
displayed.

Models and Application

The standard models of Fan Units are listed in the following table.

Inverter Replacement Cooling Fan

Max. Applicable
Voltage
Motor Capacity Model No. Model No. Qty Used
Class
(kW)
0.4 3G3PV-A2004
0.75 3G3PV-A2007
No Fan -
1.5 3G3PV-A2015
2.2 3G3PV-A2022
3.7 3G3PV-A2037
1
5.5 3G3PV-A2055
3G3IV-PFAN001041
7.5 3G3PV-A2075
2
11 3G3PV-A2110
3-phase, 200 15 3G3PV-A2150
3G3IV-PFAN001042 2
VAC 18.5 3G3PV-A2185
22 3G3PV-B2220
3G3IV-PFAN001039 2
30 3G3PV-B2300
37 3G3PV-B2370
3G3IV-PFAN001049 2
45 3G3PV-B2450
55 3G3PV-B2550
3G3IV-PFAN001052 2
75 3G3PV-B2750
90 3G3PV-B2900
3G3IV-PFAN000111 2
110 3G3PV-B211K
0.4 3G3PV-A4004
0.75 3G3PV-A4007 No Fan -
1.5 3G3PV-A4015
2.2 3G3PV-A4022
3.7 3G3PV-A4037 3G3IV-PFAN001041 1
5.5 3G3PV-A4055
7.5 3G3PV-A4075
11 3G3PV-A4110
3G3IV-PFAN001042 2
15 3G3PV-A4150
3-phase, 400 18.5 3G3PV-A4185
VAC 22 3G3PV-B4220
3G3IV-PFAN001039 2
30 3G3PV-B4300
37 3G3PV-B4370
45 3G3PV-B4450 3G3IV-PFAN001044 2
55 3G3PV-B4550
75 3G3PV-B4750
3G3IV-PFAN001052 2
90 3G3PV-B4900
110 3G3PV-B411K
132 3G3PV-B413K 3G3IV-PFAN001056 2
160 3G3PV-B416K

Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection for the Fan Unit replacement procedure.

9-9
 ‹ Separately Installed Options
The separately installed options include Scaling Meters and Analog Operators.

„ Scaling Meters
A Scaling Meter is attached to a multi-function analog output from the Inverter and is used to display rota-
tional speeds of motors, line speeds, etc., in physical units.

Models and Application

The standard models of Scaling Meters are listed in the following table.

Model No. Control Power Supply Display

K3TJ-V111R Red LED
100 to 200 VAC
K3TJ-V111G Green LED
K3TJ-V116R 24 VDC, isolated Red LED
K3TJ-V116G (See note.) Green LED
Note The power supply circuit is isolated from the input circuits.

Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the Scaling Meters are listed below.

K3TJ-V11† Specifications
Sampling Period 2 times/s
Display Refresh Cycle 2 times/s
Measurement Averaging Methods Simple average or moving average
Number of Samples for Averaging 1, 2, 4, or 8 samples
Max. No. of Display Digits 4 digits (-1999 to 9999)
Display 7-segment LEDs, character height: 14.2 mm
Decimal Point Display User-set using function selection switch and up/down keys.
Shifting and scaling are user-set using function selection switch and up/down
Scaling Method
keys.
Scaling Range -1999 to 9999
Zero Limit Range 0 to 99 digits
Overrange Values Flashing display
Zero Suppression Supported
External Controls Present value hold (by short-circuiting terminal on front panel)

Protective Structure (conforming Front panel display: IP51*

to IEC standards) Case: IP20
Terminal section: IP00
Memory Protection Non-volatile memory
* IP51 requires that the optional K32-L49SC Drop-proof Cover is used. The protective structure is IP50 without it.

9-10
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Wiring Example
A wiring example for a Scaling Meter is shown below.

Inverter

3-phase
power MCCB Analog output
supply

Analog
monitor

Dimensions
The dimensions of a Scaling Meter are given below.

Recommended panel
cutout dimensions

Display LED size

weight: 200 g

9-11
 „ Analog Operators: Standard with Steel Panels or Small in Plastic
An Analog Operator allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by
analog references from a remote location (50 m max.)

3G3IV-PJV0P96@ 3G3IV-PJV0P95@
Analog Operator Analog Operator

Models and Application

The standard models of Analog Operators are listed in the following table.

Frequency Meter
Model No.
Specifications
3G3IV-PJVOP961 DCF-6A, 3 V, 1 mA, 75 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP962 DCF-6A, 3 V, 1 mA, 150 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP963 DCF-6A, 3 V, 1 mA, 220 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP951 TRM-45, 3 V, 1 mA, 60/120 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP952 TRM-45, 3 V, 1 mA, 60/120 Hz

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Analog Operator are given below.

Front panel mounting space

Case
mounting

Mounting taps
Panel cutout hole
Rubber bushing
Weight: 1.8 kg Panel Cutout
Standard Analog Operator with Steel Panels

Front panel
mounting
space

Panel Cutout
hole

Mounting taps

Weight: 0.8 kg Panel Cutout

Small Plastic Analog Operator

9-12
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„ Braking Unit
A Braking Unit is used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor. It is not
required with Inverters of 18.5 kW or less.

Models and Application

The standard models of Braking Units are listed in the following table.

Inverter Braking Unit

Min. Resistance*
Voltage Max. Applicable Motor
Model No. Qty Used. (Ω)
Class Capacity (kW)
0.4 48
0.75 48
1.5 48
2.2 16
3.7 16
Built-in
5.5 16
7.5 9.6
11 9.6
15 9.6
200-V Class
18.5 9.6
22 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 1 6.4
30 3G3IV-CDBR2015B 2 9.6
37 3G3IV-CDBR2015B 2 9.6
45 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 2 6.4
55 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 2 6.4
75 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 3 6.4
90 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 4 6.4
110 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 5 6.4
0.4 96
0.75 96
1.5 64
2.2 64
3.7 32
Built-in
5.5 32
7.5 32
11 20
15 20
18.5 19.2
400-V Class
22 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 1 19.2
30 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 1 19.2
37 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 1 12.8
45 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 1 12.8
55 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 2 19.2
75 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 2 12.8
90 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 2 12.8
110 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 3 19.2
132 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 3 12.8
160 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 4 12.8
* The minimum resistance is the minimum value per Braking Unit except for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less, in which case it the minimum value per Inverter.

9-13
 Dimensions
The dimensions of a Braking Unit are given below.

Up
Mounting direction

Four, M4
mounting
holes

Three wire pull-out holes

(with 22mm- dia, rubber bushings)

9-14
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„ Braking Resistor Unit

A Braking Resistor Unit is used to absorb the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration
time (use rate: 10% ED). A 10% ED means that the 10% of the operating cycle time can be used to control
braking (deceleration time).

Models and Application

The standard models of Braking Resistor Units are listed below.

Inverter Braking Resistor Unit

Applicable
Resistor
Motor Approx Braking
Voltage Class Model No. Specifications Qty Used
Capacity Torque (%)
(per Unit)
(kW)
0.4 3G3IV-PLKEB20P7 70 W, 200 Ω 1 220
0.75 3G3IV-PLKEB20P7 70 W, 200 Ω 1 125
1.5 3G3IV-PLKEB21P5 260 W, 100 Ω 1 125
2.2 3G3IV-PLKEB22P2 260 W, 100 Ω 1 120
3.7 3G3IV-PLKEB23P7 390 W, 40 Ω 1 125
5.5 3G3IV-PLKEB25P5 520 W, 30 Ω 1 115
7.5 3G3IV-PLKEB27P5 780 W, 20 Ω 1 125
11 3G3IV-PLKEB2011 2400 W, 13.6 Ω 1 125
15 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 1 125
200-V Class
18.5 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 1 125
22 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 1 125
30 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 2 125
37 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 2 100
45 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 2 120
55 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 2 100
75 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 3 110
90 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 4 120
110 3G3IV-PLKEB2018 4800 W, 8 Ω 5 100
0.4 3G3IV-PLKEB40P7 70 W, 750 Ω 1 230
0.75 3G3IV-PLKEB40P7 70 W, 750 Ω 1 130
1.5 3G3IV-PLKEB41P5 260 W, 400 Ω 1 125
2.2 3G3IV-PLKEB42P2 260 W, 250 Ω 1 135
3.7 3G3IV-PLKEB43P7 390 W, 150 Ω 1 135
5.5 3G3IV-PLKEB45P5 520 W, 100 Ω 1 135
7.5 3G3IV-PLKEB47P5 780 W, 75 Ω 1 130
11 3G3IV-PLKEB4011 1040 W, 50 Ω 1 135
15 3G3IV-PLKEB4015 1560 W, 40 Ω 1 125
18.5 3G3IV-PLKEB4018 4800 W, 32 Ω 1 125
400-V Class
22 3G3IV-PLKEB4022 4800 W, 27.2 Ω 1 125
30 3G3IV-PLKEB4030 6000 W, 20 Ω 1 125
37 3G3IV-PLKEB4037 9600 W, 16 Ω 1 125
45 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 1 125
55 3G3IV-PLKEB4030 6000 W, 20 Ω 2 135
75 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 2 145
90 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 2 100
110 3G3IV-PLKEB4030 6000 W, 20 Ω 3 100
132 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 4 140
160 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 4 140

9-15
 Dimensions
The dimensions of a Braking Resistor Unit are given below.

Model No. Dimensions (mm)

Voltage Dimensions Weight
3G3IV- Diagram Mounting
Class (kg)
PLKEB†
A B C D
Screws
20P7 1 105 275 50 260 M5 × 3 3.0
21P5 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
22P2 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
23P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 5.0
25P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 7.5
200-V Class
27P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 8.5
2011 2 266 543 246 340 M8 × 4 10
2015 2 356 543 336 340 M8 × 4 15
2018 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
2022 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
40P7 1 105 275 50 260 M5 × 3 3.0
41P5 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
42P2 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
43P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 5.0
45P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 7.5
47P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 8.5
400-V Class 4011 2 266 543 246 340 M8 × 4 10
4015 2 356 543 336 340 M8 × 4 15
4018 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
4022 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
4030 2 356 956 336 740 M8 × 4 25
4037 2 446 956 426 740 M8 × 4 33
4045 2 446 956 426 740 M8 × 4 33

Mounting screw

Mounting screw

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-16
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„ Digital Operator Connection Cable

Connected the Inverter to a Digital Operator in a remote locations. Both 1-m and 3-m Cables are available.

Models and Application

Model No. Specifications

3G3IV-PCN126 Cable length: 1 m
3G3IV-PCN326-E Cable length: 3 m

„Personal computer Cable

Connect the Inverter and the Personal Computer. Only available in 3m.

Model no. Specifications

3G3IV-PCN329-E Cable length: 3 m

„Software tool SYSDrive Configurator

Software tool for programming, downloading, uploading and monitoring for OMRON Inverters.

Model no. Specifications

9950058/6 SYSDrive Configurator V1.2

9-17
 „ DC Reactor
A DC Reactor is used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter. It is more effective than and can be used
in combination with an AC Reactor. It is also used to increase the power factor.

Models and Application

The standard models of DC Reactors are listed below.

Inverter DC Reactor
Max. Appli-
Rated Rated
Voltage cable Motor Inductance Loss
Model No. Voltage Current
Class Capacity (mH) (W)
(V) (A)
(kW)
0.4/0.75 3G3HV-PUZDAB5.4A8MH 5.4 8 8
1.5 to 3.7 3G3HV-PUZDAB18A3MH 18 3 18
5.5/7.5 3G3HV-PUZDAB36A1MH 36 1 22
200-V Class 3G3HV- DC800
11/15 72 0.5 29
PUZDAB72A0.5MH
3G3HV-
18.5 90 0.4 45
PUZDAB90A0.4MH
3G3HV-
0.4/0.75 3.2 28 9
PUZDAB3.2A28MH
3G3HV-
1.5 to 2.2 5.7 11 11
PUZDAB5.7A11MH
3G3HV-
3.7 12 6.3 16
PUZDAB12A6.3MH
400-V Class DC800
3G3HV-
5.5/7.5 23 3.6 27
PUZDAB23A3.6MH
3G3HV-
11/15 33 1.9 26
PUZDAB33A1.9MH
3G3HV-
18.5 47 1.3 42
PUZDAB47A1.3MH

9-18
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of a DC Reactor are given below.

Model Dimensions (mm)

Dimensions Weight
3G3HV-
PUZDAB † Diagram H W W1 D D1 D2 t d1 d2 (kg)
5.4A8MH 1 53 85 74 60 32 - 0.8 M4 - 0.8
18A3MH 2 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
36A1MH 2 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M6 3.2
72A0.5MH 2 93 105 64 112 100 105 1.6 M6 M8 4.9
90A0.4MH 2 117 133 86 105 80 120 1.6 M6 M8 6.5
3.2A28MH 1 53 85 74 60 32 - 0.8 M4 - 0.8
5.7A11MH 1 60 90 80 60 32 - 0.8 M4 - 1.0
12A6.3MH 2 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
23A3.6MH 2 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M5 3.2
33A1.9MH 2 93 105 64 102 90 95 1.6 M6 M6 4.0
47A1.3MH 2 100 115 72 115 90 125 1.6 M6 M6 6.0

2 mounting holes
App. screws: d2

2 mounting holes
App. screws: d1

4 mounting holes
App. screws: d1

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-19
 „ AC Reactor
An AC Reactor is used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity is
greatly larger than the Inverter’s capacity. It is also used to increase the power factor. Select the AC Reactor
from the following table according to the motor capacity.

Models and Application

The standard models of AC Reactors are listed in the following table.

Inverter AC Reactor
Max. Appli-
Voltage cable Motor Current Inductance Loss
Model No.
Class Capacity (A) (mH) (W)
(kW)
0.4 3G3IV-PUZBAB2.5A4.2MH 2.5 4.2 15
0.75 3G3IV-PUZBAB5A2.1MH 5 2.1 15
1.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB10A1.1MH 10 1.1 25
2.2 3G3IV-PUZBAB15A0.71MH 15 0.71 30
3.7 3G3IV-PUZBAB20A0.53MH 20 0.53 35
5.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB30A0.35MH 30 0.35 45
7.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB40A0.265MH 40 0.265 50
200-V Class 11 3G3IV-PUZBAB60A0.18MH 60 0.18 65
15 3G3IV-PUZBAB80A0.13MH 80 0.13 75
18.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB90A0.12MH 90 0.12 90
22 3G3IV-PUZBAB120A0.09MH 120 0.09 90
30 3G3IV-PUZBAB160A0.07MH 160 0.07 100
37 3G3IV-PUZBAB200A0.05MH 200 0.05 110
45 3G3IV-PUZBAB240A0.044MH 240 0.044 125
55 3G3IV-PUZBAB280A0.038MH 280 0.038 130
0.4 3G3IV-PUZBAB1.3A18.0MH 1.3 18.0 15
0.75 3G3IV-PUZBAB2.5A8.4MH 2.5 8.4 15
1.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB5A4.2MH 5 4.2 25
2.2 3G3IV-PUZBAB7.5A3.6MH 7.5 3.6 35
3.7 3G3IV-PUZBAB10A2.2MH 10 2.2 43
5.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB15A1.42MH 15 1.42 50
7.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB20A1.06MH 20 1.06 50
400-V Class 11 3G3IV-PUZBAB30A0.7MH 30 0.7 65
15 3G3IV-PUZBAB40A0.53MH 40 0.53 90
18.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB50A0.42MH 50 0.42 90
22 3G3IV-PUZBAB60A0.36MH 60 0.36 90
30 3G3IV-PUZBAB80A0.26MH 80 0.26 95
37 3G3IV-PUZBAB90A0.24MH 90 0.24 110
45 3G3IV-PUZBAB120A0.18MH 120 0.18 130
55 3G3IV-PUZBAB150A0.15MH 150 0.15 150

9-20
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Wiring Example
A wiring example for an AC Reactor is shown below.

AC reactor

MCCB
Inverter Motor

Dimensions
The dimensions of a DC Reactor are given below.

Model Dimen- Dimensions (mm)

Weight
3G3IV sions
-PUZBAB† Diagram A B B1 C D E F H J K L M (kg)
2.5A4.2MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
5A2.1MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
1
10A1.1MH 130 88 - 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 3
15A0.71MH 130 88 - 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 3
20A0.53MH 130 88 114 105 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M5 3
30A0.35MH 130 88 119 105 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M5 3
40A0.265MH 130 98 139 105 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M6 4
60A0.18MH 160 105 147.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M6 6
80A0.13MH 180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8 8
90A0.12MH 2 180 100 150 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8 8
120A0.09MH 180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M10 8
160A0.07MH 210 100 170 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M10 12
200A0.05MH 210 115 182.8 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M10 15
240A0.044MH 240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M6 8 7 M10 23
280A0.038MH 240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M12 23
1.3A18.0MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
2.5A8.4MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
5A4.2MH 130 88 - 130 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M4 3
1
7.5A3.6MH 130 88 - 130 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M4 3
10A2.2MH 130 88 - 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 3
15A1.42MH 130 98 - 130 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 4
20A1.06MH 160 90 115 130 75 70 160 25 M6 10 7 M5 5
30A0.7MH 160 105 132.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M5 6
40A0.53MH 180 100 140 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6 8
50A0.42MH 180 100 145 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6 8
60A0.36MH 2 180 100 150 150 75 75 180 25 M6 10 7 M6 8.5
80A0.26MH 210 100 150 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M8 12
90A0.24MH 210 115 177.5 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M8 15
120A0.18MH 240 126 193 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10 23
150A0.15MH 240 126 193 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10 23

M: Terminal Nameplate

M: Terminal
Nameplate

Mounting hole
J: 4 mounting bolts
Mounting hole detail J: 4 mounting bolts

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-21
 „ Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives (3G3RV-PFI†, by Schaffner)
When conformance to the EMC Directives in the EC Directives is required, always use one of these Filters.
The Filter is connected between the Inverter’s power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the power
supply.
There are holes for mounting the Noise Filters to Inverters on the top of the Noise Filters. Use these holes to
secure the Noise Filters to the Inverters.

Models and Application

The standard models of Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives are listed in the following table.

Inverter Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives

Max. Applicable Rated Cur- Weight Dimensions
Voltage Class Model No. Diagram
Motor Capacity (kW) rent (A) (kg)
0.4
0.75 10 3G3RV-PFI3010-SE 1.1
1.5
1
2.2 18 3G3RV-PFI3018-SE 1.3
3.7
35 3G3RV-PFI2035-SE 1.4
5.5
7.5
60 3G3RV-PFI2060-SE 3 2
3-phase, 200 VAC 11
15
100 3G3RV-PFI2100-SE 4.9 3
18.5
22
130 3G3RV-PFI2130-SE 4.3 5
30
37 160 3G3RV-PFI2160-SE 6 6
45
240 3G3RV-PFI2200-SE 11 7
55
0.4
0.75
10 3G3RV-PFI3010-SE 1.1
1.5
2.2 1
3.7
4.0 18 3G3RV-PFI3018-SE 1.3
5.5
7.5
35 3G3RV-PFI3035-SE 2.1 2
11
3-phase, 400 VAC
15
60 3G3RV-PFI3060-SE 4 3
18.5
22
70 3G3RV-PFI 3070-SE 3.4 4
30
37
45 130 3G3RV-PFI3130-SE 4.7 5
55
75 170 3G3RV-PFI3170-SE 6.0 6
90 200 3G3RV-PFI3200-SE 11.0 7

Wiring Example
A wiring example for an Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives is shown below.

MCCB Noise filter Clamp core

Inverter
Inverter

3-phase 200 VAC

3-phase 400 VAC

9-22
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter (by Schaffner)for EMC Directives are given below.

M5 (Inverter mounting holes x 4)

M6 (Inverter mounting holes x 4)

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

M5 (Inverter mounting holes x 4)

Dimensions Diagram 3 Dimensions Diagram 4

Dimensions Diagram 5 Dimensions Diagram 6

Dimensions Diagram 7

9-23
 Installation of Schaffner filters

9-24
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives (3G3RV-PFI†, by Rasmi Electronics)

When conformance to the EMC Directives in the EC Directives is required, always use one of these Filters.
The Filter is connected between the Inverter’s power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the power
supply.
There are holes for mounting the Noise Filters to Inverters on the top of the Noise Filters. Use these holes to
secure the Noise Filters to the Inverters.

Models and Application

The standard models of Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives are listed in the following table.

Inverter Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives

Max. Applicable Rated Cur- Dimensions
Voltage Class Model No. Diagram
Motor Capacity (kW) rent (A)
0.4
0.75 10 3G3RV-PFI3010-E
1.5
2.2 18 3G3RV-PFI3018-E
3.7
35 3G3RV-PFI2035-E 1
5.5
7.5
3-phase, 200 VAC 60 3G3RV-PFI2060-E
11
15
100 3G3RV-PFI2100-E
18.5
22
130 3G3RV-PFI2130-E
30
2
37 160 3G3RV-PFI2160-E
45 200 3G3RV-PFI2200-E
0.4
0.75
10 3G3RV-PFI3010-E
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0 18 3G3RV-PFI3018-E 1
5.5
7.5
35 3G3RV-PFI3035-E
11
3-phase, 400 VAC
15
60 3G3RV-PFI3060-E
18.5
22
70 3G3RV-PFI3070-E
30
37
100 3G3RV-PFI3100-E
45 2
55 130 3G3RV-PFI3130-E
75 170 3G3RV-PFI3170-E
90 200 3G3RV-PFI3200-E

9-25
 Dimensions
The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter (by Rasmi)for EMC Directives are given below.

Model Dimen- Dimensions (mm)

3G3IV sions
PFI † Diagram L W H X Y d
3G3RV-PFI3010-E
3G3RV-PFI3018-E 330 143 46 313 115 M5
3G3RV-PFI2035-E 1
3G3RV-PFI2060-E 355 213 60 336 175 M6
3G3RV-PFI2100-E 408 238 80 390 205 M6
3G3RV-PFI2130-E 310 90 180 295 65 M6
3G3RV-PFI2160-E 2 380 120 170 365 102 M6
3G3RV-PFI2200-E 518 130 240 498 90 M8
3G3RV-PFI3010-E
330 143 46 313 115 M5
3G3RV-PFI3018-E 1
3G3RV-PFI3035-E 355 213 51 336 175 M6
3G3RV-PFI3060-E 408 238 60 390 205 M6
3G3RV-PFI3070-E 329 80 220 314 55 M6
3G3RV-PFI3100-E
2 310 90 180 295 65 M6
3G3RV-PFI3130-E
3G3RV-PFI3170-E 380 120 170 365 102 M6
3G3RV-PFI3200-E 518 130 240 498 90 M8

Dimension diagram 1 Dimension diagram 2

9-26
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„Simple Input Noise Filter

A Simple Input Noise Filter reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce
noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connect the Filter to the power supply input side.

Models and Application

The standard models of Simple Input Noise Filters are listed in the following table.

Inverter Simple Input Noise Filter

Max. Applicable Rated
Voltage
Motor Capacity Model No. Qty Current
Class
(kW) (A)
0.4 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 1 10
0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 1 10
1.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 1 10
2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD2153DY 1 15
3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 1 30
200-V Class 5.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2203DY 2 40
7.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 2 60
11 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 3 90
15 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 3 90
18.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 4 120
22 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 4 120
0.4 3G3EV-PLNFD4053DY 1 5
0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD4053DY 1 5
1.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4103DY 1 10
2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD4103DY 1 10
3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD4153DY 1 15
5.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4203DY 1 20
7.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 1 30
400-V Class
11 3G3EV-PLNFD4203DY 2 40
15 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 2 60
18.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 2 60
22 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 3 90
30 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 3 90
37 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 4 120
45 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 4 120

9-27
 Wiring Example
A wiring example for a Simple Input Noise Filter is shown below.

Input Noise Filter Inverter

Dimensions
The dimensions of a Simple Input Noise Filter are given below.

Dimensions
Model Dimensions Weight
Diagram Mounting
3G3EV- W D Hmax A A' B (kg)
Screws
M4 × 4
PLNFD2103DY 120 80 55 108 - 68 0.2
20 mm
M4 × 4
PLNFD2153DY 1 120 80 55 108 - 68 0.2
20 mm
M4 × 4
PLNFD2203DY 170 90 70 158 - 78 0.4
20 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD2303DY 170 110 70 - 79 98 0.5
20 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4053DY 170 130 75 - 79 118 0.3
30 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4103DY 170 130 95 - 79 118 0.4
30 mm
2
M4 × 6
PLNFD4153DY 170 130 95 - 79 118 0.4
30 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4203DY 200 145 100 - 94 133 0.5
30 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4303DY 200 145 100 - 94 133 0.6
30 mm

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-28
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„ Input Noise Filter

An Input Noise Filter reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise
flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connect the Filter to the power supply input side.

Models and Application

The standard models of Input Noise Filters are listed in the following table.

Inverter Input Noise Filter

Max. Applicable
Voltage
Motor Capacity Model No. Qty Rated (A)
Class
(kW)
5.5 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 1 42
7.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 1 55
11 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 1 75
15 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 1 100
18.5 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
22 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
200-V Class 30 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 1 180
37 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 1 250
45 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 1 250
55 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 1 300
75 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500
90 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500
110 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 2 600
11 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 1 42
15 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 1 55
18.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 1 55
22 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 1 75
30 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 1 100
37 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
400-V Class 45 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
55 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 1 180
75 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 1 250
90 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 1 300
110 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 1 300
132 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500
160 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500

Wiring Example
Wiring for an Input Noise Filter is the same as that for a Simple Input Noise Filter.

9-29
 Dimensions
The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter are given below.

Dimensions Dimensions (mm) Weight

Model 3G3IV- Diagram A B C D E F G H J (kg)
PFN258L4207 329 300 325 185 70 M6 45 314 4-M5 2.8
1
PFN258L5507 329 300 353 185 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 3.1
PFN258L7534 329 300 377 220 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 4
PFN258L10035 2 379 350 436 220 90 M10 65 364 4-M5 5.5
PFN258L13035 439 400 486 240 110 M10 80 414 4-M5 7.5
PFN258L18007 3 438 400 480 240 110 M10 80 413 4-M5 11
PFN359L25099 - - - - - - - - - 16
4
PFN359L30099 - - - - - - - - - 16

J (mounting screw)
J (mounting screw)

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

J (mounting screw)

Dimensions Diagram 3 Dimensions Diagram 4

9-30
 Options and Peripheral Devices

„ Output Noise Filter

An Output Noise Filter controls noise generated by the Inverter so it does not affect the surrounding equip-
ment. It is connected to the motor output side.

Models and Application

The standard models of Output Noise Filters are listed in the following table.

Inverter Output Noise Filter

Max. Applicable Inverter Rated
Voltage
Motor Capacity Capacity No. Qty Current
Class
(kW) (kVA) (A)
0.4 1.2 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
0.75 1.6 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
1.5 2.7 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
2.2 3.7 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
3.7 5.7 3G3IV-PLF320KA 1 20
5.5 8.8 3G3IV-PLF350KA 1 50
7.5 12 3G3IV-PLF350KA 1 50
11 17 3G3IV-PLF350KA 2 100
15 22 3G3IV-PLF350KA 2 100
200-V Class
18.5 27 3G3IV-PLF350KA 2 100
22 32 3G3IV-PLF350KA 3 150
30 44 3G3IV-PLF350KA 3 150
37 55 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 2 220
45 69 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 2 220
55 82 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 3 330
75 110 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
90 130 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
110 160 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 5 550
0.4 1.4 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
0.75 1.6 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
1.5 2.8 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
2.2 4 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
3.7 5.8 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
5.5 9.5 3G3IV-PLF320KB 1 20
7.5 13 3G3IV-PLF320KB 1 20
11 18 3G3IV-PLF335KB 1 35
15 24 3G3IV-PLF335KB 1 35
18.5 30 3G3IV-PLF345KB 1 45
400-V Class
22 34 3G3IV-PLF375KB 1 75
30 46 3G3IV-PLF375KB 1 75
37 57 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 1 110
45 69 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 1 110
55 85 3G3IV-PLF375KB 2 150
75 110 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 2 220
90 140 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 3 330
110 160 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 3 330
132 200 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
160 230 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
* Connect the Filters in parallel when connecting more than one Filter, and use a relay terminal block to balance the current.

9-31
 Wiring Example
A wiring example for an Output Noise Filter is shown below.

Output Noise Filter

Inverter

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Output Noise Filter are given below.

Model G H Weight
Terminal A B C D E F
3G3IV- (Diameter) (Diameter) (kg)
PLF310KA TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.5
PLF320KA TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.6
PLF350KA TE-K22 M6 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 × 4.5 4.5 2.0
PLF310KB TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.5
PLF320KB TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.6
PLF335KB TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.8
PLF345KB TE-K22 M6 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 × 4.5 4.5 2.0
PLF375KB TE-K22 M6 540 320 480 300 340 240 9 × 6.5 6.5 12.0
PLF3110KB TE-K60 M8 540 340 480 300 340 240 9 × 6.5 6.5 19.5

9-32
 10
Chapter 10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor and peripheral devices and also pro-
vides lists of parameters.

Inverter Application Precautions ................................10-2

Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-5
User Parameters...................................................... 10-11
Revision History.......................................................10-14
 Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting and handling Inverters.

‹ Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.

„Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can
destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power sup-
ply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.

DC or AC reactor
Power supply Required
capacity
(kVA) DC or AC reactor
Not required

Inverter capacity (kVA)

Fig 10.1

„Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.

„Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start-
ing using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.

„Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer-
gency stop.

„Options
Terminals , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by OMRON. Never
connect any other devices to these terminals.

10-2
 Inverter Application Precautions

‹ Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.

„Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust and other contami-
nants or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.

„Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.

‹ Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.

„Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 120 Hz. Incorrect settings
can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits. (The maximum output
frequency is factory-set to 50 Hz.)

„DC Injection Braking

The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.

„Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera-
tion or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase
the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.

10-3
 ‹ Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.

„Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.

„Magnetic Contactor Installation

Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.

„Maintenance and Inspections

After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator does not lit any-
more before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause elec-
tric shock.

10-4
 Motor Application Precautions

Motor Application Precautions

‹ Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated by the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated by a com-
mercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard
motor.

„Low Speed Range

Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not mabe by OMRON. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special inverter or vector motor.

„Installation Withstand Voltage

If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your OMRON representative for details.

„High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (50 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing
durability. Contact your OMRON representative for details.

„Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when oper-
ated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the
motor to set a proper V/f pattern.

„Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A parameter can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the
same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.

Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System

Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a parameter speed is to be operated in variable
speed mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump
function to skip any frequency resonating the machine.

Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (50 Hz or more).

„Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is
operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (50 Hz).

10-5
 ‹ Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.

„Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the
number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or over-
current protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.

„Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.

„Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with
the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.

„Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If
the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.

„Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually
turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.

„Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.

‹ Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher
than 50 Hz.

10-6
 Wiring Examples

Wiring Examples
This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main
circuits, examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I/O, and other aspects of Inverter wiring.

‹ Using a Braking Resistor Unit

This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit.
3G3PV-A2004-E to 3G3PV-A2185-E (200-V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
3G3PV-4004-E to 3G3PV-A4185-E (400-V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)

Braking Resistor overheating contacts

(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
A sequence is required to turn DC Reactor to
OFF the power supply for the ther- improve input
mal overload relay trip contacts of power factor
the Braking Resistor Unit. Braking Resistor Unit *3

Short-circuit

3-phase power MC Motor

R/L1 U/T1
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
or 380 to 460 V S/L2 V/T2
50/60 Hz T/L3 W/T3
Inverter

200-V class Inverters: Ground to

Overload relay trip contact
100 Ω max., 400-V class Inverters:
of Braking Resistor Unit Ground to 10 Ω max.)

* 1. A transformer is not required for 200-V class

* 2. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and
+ 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
Fault contacts * 3. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and
using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the
deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Fig 10.2

10-7
 ‹ Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
This example shows wiring for a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit.
3G3PV-A2220-E, 3G3PV-A2300-E (200-V class Inverters of 22 kW, 30 kW)

DC Reactor Braking Unit Braking Resistor

to improve (Optional) Unit*2 (Optional)
A sequence is required to turn
input power Level
OFF the power supply for the detector
thermal overload relay trip con-
tacts of the Braking Resistor
Unit. Braking Resistor overheat-
ing contacts (Thermal overload relay
Short-circuit bar
MCCB
Motor
3-phase power R/L1 U/T1
200 to 230 V 50/60 S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Inverter

Overload relay trip contact Ground to 100Ω

of Braking Resistor Unit

* 1. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and +

2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 2. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and
using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the
deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Forward Run/Stop Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop Forward run command (forward run when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse run command (reverse run when ON)
Braking Unit
External fault

10-8
 Wiring Examples

‹ Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel

This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel.

Thermal Thermal Thermal

protector protector protector

Braking Braking Braking

Resistor Resistor Resistor
A sequence is required to turn OFF the Unit Unit Unit
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.

detector
Level
Braking Unit

Thermal
Thermalswitch
switch
MCCB
Motor
R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power Inverter
380 to 480 V 50/ S/L2 V/T2
60 Hz
T/L3 W/T3

Voltage cooling Fan

setting

Overload relay trip contact Ground to 10 Ω max.

of Braking Resistor Unit

Fault contact output

Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop Forward run command
(forward run when ON
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse run command
Braking Unit (reverse run when ON)
External fault

* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may
not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Fig 10.3

10-9
 ‹ Using an Analog Operator
This example shows wiring for using an Analog Operator. The Analog Operator model number is 3G3IV-
†
PJVOP95 or 3G3IV-PJVOP96 . †
This example shows wiring for the 3G3PV-A2075-E (200-V class Inverters of 7.5 kW)

Short circuit bar

not used

MCCB
Motor

R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power Inverter
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3

Ground to 100 Ω max.

Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)

Multi-function contact inputs

Sequence common (0 V)

Shield terminal

Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)

Master speed (0 to 10 V, 20 kΩ)

Master speed (4 to 20 mA, 250 Ω)

Multi-function contact
output (Default: Running
signal)

Fault contact output

Open collector 1

Multi-function
analog output
Frequency meter Open collector 2 NOT USED

Multi-function
analog output
(Default: Output Multi function common
frequency) output

Fig 10.4

10-10
 User Parameters

User Parameters
Factory settings are given in the following table. These setting are for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW set
to factory set control method (open loop vector control).

Table 10.1 Parameters

Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
A1-00 Language selection for digital LED operator display 0*1
A1-01 Parameter access level 2
A1-03 Initialize 0
A1-04 Password 0
A1-05 Password setting 0
b1-01 Reference selection 1
b1-02 Operation method selection 1
b1-03 Stopping method selection 0
b1-07 Operation selection after switching to remote mode 0
b1-08 Run command selection in programming modes 0
b2-01 Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency) 0.5
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start 0.00
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.50
b3-01 Speed search selection 2
b3-02 Speed search operating current 100
b3-03 Speed search deceleration time 2.0
b3-05 Speed search wait time 0.2
b5-01 PI control mode selection 0
b5-02 Proportional gain (P) 1.00
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0
b5-04 Integral (I) limit 100.0
b5-06 PI limit 100.0
b5-07 PI offset adjustment 0.0
b5-08 PI primary delay time 0.00
b5-12 Selection of PI feedback command loss detection 0
b5-13 PI feedback command loss detection level 0
b5-14 PI feedback command loss detection time 1.0
b5-15 PI sleep function operation level 0.0
b5-16 PI sleep operation delay time 0.0
b5-17 Acceleration/deceleration time for PI reference 0.0
b8-01 Energy saving mode selection 0.0
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient 0
b8-05 Power detection filter time 20
b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter 0
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 10.0
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 10.0
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 10.0
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 10.0
C1-09 Fast Stop Time 10.0
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching frequency 0.0
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start 0.20
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0.20
C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00
C4-02 Torque compensation time 200
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 6*3
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit 15.0*3
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit 15.0*3
C6-05 Carrier Freq. Proportional Gain 00
d1-01 Frequency reference 1 0.00
d1-02 Frequency reference 2 0.00
d1-03 Frequency reference 3 0.00
d1-04 Frequency reference 4 0.00

10-11
 Table 10.1 Parameters (Continued)
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
d1-17 Jog frequency reference 6.00
d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0
d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0
d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 0.0
d3-02 Jump frequency 2 0.0
d3-03 Jump frequency 3 0.0
d3-04 Jump frequency width 1.0
d6-01 Field weakening level 80
d6-02 Field frequency 0.0
E1-01 Input voltage setting 200*4
E1-03 V/f pattern selection F
E1-04 Max. output frequency 50.0
E1-05 Max. voltage 200.0*4
E1-06 Base frequency 50.0
E1-07 Mid. output frequency 2.5
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage 15.0 *4
E1-09 Min. output frequency 1.2
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage 9.0*4
E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2 0.0*6
E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0*6
E1-13 Base voltage 0.0*4
E2-01 Motor rated current 1.90*3
E2-05 Terminal Resistance 9.842
F6-01 Operation selection after communications error 1
F6-02 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card 0
F6-03 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card 1
F6-05 I monitor unit selection 0
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection 14
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection 3 (0)*5
H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection 4 (3)*5
H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection 6 (4)*5
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact) 0
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection (contact) 1
H3-02 Gain (terminal A1) 0
H3-03 Bias (terminal A1) 100.0
H3-08 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection 0
H3-09 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection 2
H3-10 Gain (terminal A2) 100.0
H3-11 Bias (terminal A2) 0.0
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching 0
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM) 2
H4-02 Gain (terminal FM) 100%
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM) 0.0
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM) 3
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM) 50%
H4-06 Bias (terminal AM) 0.0
H4-07 Analog output 1 signal level selection 0
H4-08 Analog output 2 signal level selection 0
H5-01 Station address 1F
H5-02 Communication speed selection 3
H5-03 Communication parity selection 0
H5-04 Stopping method after communication error 3
H5-05 Communication error detection selection 1
H5-06 Send wait time 5
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 1
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1

10-12
 User Parameters

Table 10.1 Parameters (Continued)

Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
L1-02 Motor protection time 1.0
L1-03 Alarm operation selection during motor overheating 3
L1-04 Motor overheating operation selection 1
L1-05 Motor temperature input filter time 0.20
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection 0
L2-02 Momentary power loss ridethru time 0.1*3
L2-03 Min. baseblock time 0.1
L2-04 Voltage recovery time 0.3
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level 190*4
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during accel 1
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel 120
L3-04 Stall prevention selection during decel 1
L3-05 Stall prevention selection during running 1
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running 120
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0
L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing 0
L4-06 Frequency Reference for loss of Frequency Reference 80%
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 0
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 0
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1 0
L6-02 Torque detection level 1 150
L6-03 Torque detection time 1 0.1
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 95
L8-03 Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm 3
L8-09 Ground protection selection 1
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 60
L8-12 Ambient temperature 45
L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds 1
L8-18 Soft CLA selection 1
N1-01 Hunting-prevention function selection 1
N1-02 Hunting-prevention gain 1.00
N3-01 High-slip braking deceleration frequency width 5
N3-02 High-slip braking current limit 150
N3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time 1.0
N3-04 High-slip braking OL time 40
o1-01 Monitor selection 6
o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1
o1-03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor 0
o1-05 LCD Brightness 3
o2-01 LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable 1
o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation 1
o2-03 Parameter initial value 0
o2-04 kVA selection 0*3
o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection 0
o2-06 Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected 0
o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0
o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection 0
o2-09 Initialize mode 5
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0
o2-12 Fault trace history initialisation 0
o3-01 Copy function selection 0
o3-02 Read permitted selection 0
* 1. Not initialized. (PV-E specifications: A1-00 = 0)
* 2. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
* 3. Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 4. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
* 5. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
* 6. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.

10-13
 Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat.No. I537-E2-01

Revision Code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.

Revision code Date Revised content

01 November 2001 Original production

10-14